YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2005 All rights reserved.
RX-V757
Printed in Malaysia WE59930
RX-V757
AV Receiver
OWNER’S MANUAL
U
01EN_RX-V757_U-cv_version1.fm Page 1 Friday, December 24, 2004 4:29 PM
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
i
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the product is operated.
2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use
a damp cloth for cleaning.
6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by
the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –
for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or
laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;
and the like.
8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.
Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven
surfaces may cause the product and cart
combination to overturn.
10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack
unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s
instructions have been adhered to.
11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If
you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,
consult your product dealer or local power company. For
products intended to operate from battery power, or other
sources, refer to the operating instructions.
12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped
with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not
defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched
by items placed upon or against them, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the product.
14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line
surges.
15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other
electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such
power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna
system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching
such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.
16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension
cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result
in a risk of fire or electric shock.
17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind
into this product through openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result
in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on
the product.
18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself
as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
ii
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
d) If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal
operation,
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way, and
f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-
mance - this indicates a need for service.
20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer or have the same
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating
condition.
22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,
provides information with regard to proper grounding of the
mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire
to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding
electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s
attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides
guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies
that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding
system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as
practical.
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to
follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to
use this product in the USA.
3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15
for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that
your use of this product in a residential environment will
not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found
in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the
operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this
product is found to be the source of interference, which
can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
iii
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this
manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future
reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool,
dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat
sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.
Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top,
20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of
this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical
appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid
humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature
changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit
in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with
a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this
unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may
fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to
liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit,
do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage
and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall
and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user
and/or damage to this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth,
curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If
the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all
connections are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may
overheat, possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall
outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this
might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.
Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified
is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this
unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be
held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the
power cord and outdoor antenna from the wall outlet
during an electrical storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact
qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any
service is needed. The cabinet should never be
opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods
of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug
from the wall outlet.
16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section
on common operating errors before concluding that
this unit is faulty.
17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set
this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the
AC power plug from the wall outlet.
18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models
only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this
unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE
plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are:
Asia model ..................... 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
General model
........................... 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment
by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through
loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most
importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.
Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often
undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group recommend you to avoid
prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,
even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called
the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to
consume a very small quantity of power.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
1
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION
BASIC
OPERATION
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
FEATURES............................................................. 2
GETTING STARTED............................................ 3
Supplied accessories.................................................. 3
Installing batteries in the remote control................... 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4
Front panel................................................................. 4
Remote control...........................................................6
Using the remote control ........................................... 7
Front panel display ....................................................8
Rear panel................................................................10
SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 11
Speaker placement................................................... 11
Speaker connections ................................................ 12
CONNECTIONS .................................................. 15
Before connecting components................................15
Connecting video components................................. 16
Connecting audio components................................. 19
Connecting the FM and AM antennas..................... 21
Connecting the power supply cord .......................... 22
Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 23
Turning on the power............................................... 23
AUTO SETUP....................................................... 24
Introduction.............................................................. 24
Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 24
Starting the setup ..................................................... 25
PLAYBACK.......................................................... 30
Basic operations....................................................... 30
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 32
Selecting input modes.............................................. 37
FM/AM TUNING................................................. 39
Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 39
Presetting stations.................................................... 40
Selecting preset stations........................................... 42
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 43
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING .................. 45
What is XM Satellite Radio?...................................45
XM Satellite Radio connections..............................45
XM Satellite Radio functions .................................. 46
Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................47
Basic XM Satellite Radio operations.......................48
XM Satellite Radio search modes............................ 49
Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels ............52
RECORDING....................................................... 55
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
DESCRIPTIONS...............................................56
For movie/video sources.......................................... 56
For music sources.................................................... 58
ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................59
Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 59
Using the sleep timer............................................... 59
Manually adjusting speaker levels........................... 60
SET MENU............................................................61
Using SET MENU................................................... 63
1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 64
2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 69
3 OPTION MENU................................................... 71
ADVANCED SETUP MENU...............................73
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................75
Control area ............................................................. 75
Setting remote control codes ................................... 76
Controlling other components ................................. 78
Programming codes from other remote controls..... 79
Changing source names in the display window....... 80
Clearing function sets.............................................. 81
Clearing individual functions .................................. 82
ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA, AUSTRALIA
AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY) ..................83
Zone 2 connections.................................................. 83
Remote controlling Zone 2...................................... 84
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......86
What is a sound field ............................................... 86
Changing parameter settings ................................... 86
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER
DESCRIPTIONS...............................................88
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................93
RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS ........98
GLOSSARY...........................................................99
Audio formats.......................................................... 99
Sound field programs............................................. 100
Audio information ................................................. 100
Video signal information....................................... 101
SPECIFICATIONS.............................................102
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
FEATURES
2
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(0.06% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω)
Front: 100 W + 100 W
Center: 100 W
Surround: 100 W + 100 W
Surround back: 100 W + 100 W
Sound field features
◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of
sound fields
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6,
DTS 96/24 decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/
Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA
™
Sophisticated AM/FM tuner
◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)
XM Satellite Radio
◆ XM Satellite Radio programming (using the “XM
connect and Play digital antenna accessory”, sold
separately)
Other features
◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer for automatic speaker setup
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ A SET MENU that provides you with items for
optimizing this unit for your audio/video system
◆ 8 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input
◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and
PCM sources
◆ On-screen display function helpful in controlling this
unit
◆ S-video signal input/output capability
◆ Component video input/output capability
◆ Video signal conversion (Composite video ↔ S-video
→ Component video) capability for monitor out
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Sleep timer
◆ Cinema and music night listening modes
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes and
“learning” capability
◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility (U.S.A., Canada,
Australia and Europe models only)
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button
names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In
case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA
CORPORATION.
“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM
Satellite Radio Inc.
FEATURES
GETTING STARTED
3
INTRODUCTION
Please check that you received all of the following parts.
1 Press the part and slide the battery
compartment cover off.
2
Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03,
UM-4) according to the polarity markings
(+ / –) on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.
Notes on batteries
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following
conditions; the operation range of the remote control decreases,
the indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
GETTING STARTED
Supplied accessories
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDI O
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE
A-E/CAT.
BAND
TV INPUT
TV VOL
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
PURE DIRECT
EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT
NIGHT
SPEAKERSAB
EFFECTMEMORY
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
Remote control
Batteries (4)
(AAA, R03, UM-4)
Indoor FM antenna
(U.S.A., Canada, China
and General models)
AM loop antenna
Indoor FM antenna
(Europe, Australia and
Korea models)
Optimizer microphone
Installing batteries in the remote
control
1
3
2
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries, set up the remote control code and program
any acquired functions that may have been cleared.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
4
1 STANDBY/ON
Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When
you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will
be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce
sound.
In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in
order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control.
2 OPTIMIZER MIC jack
Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied
microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see
page 24).
3 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control.
4 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this
unit.
5 A/B/C/D/E, NEXT, CATEGORY
*
Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when
the unit is in tuner mode.
Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted when the unit is
not in tuner mode.
6 PRESET/TUNING/ CH* l / h, LEVEL –/+
Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is
displayed next to the band indication in the front panel
display when the unit is in tuner mode. Selects the tuning
frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed.
Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using
A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) when the unit is not in tuner mode.
7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for
more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning.
8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO),
DISPLAY*
Switches the tuning mode between automatic (AUTO
indicator on) and manual (AUTO indicator off).
9 VIDEO AUX jacks
Input audio and video signals from a portable external
source such as a game console. To reproduce source
signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input
source.
0 VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
This does not affect the REC OUT level.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
MAIN
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 2
DISPLAY
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
LEVEL
CATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
XM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
31452609
J
KHGEBACDF I
L
78
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A., Canada,
Australia and Europe
models only)
Note
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
5
INTRODUCTION
A PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals
are output to the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers.
All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down
to the left and right headphone channels.
B SPEAKERS A/B
Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A
and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the
corresponding button is pressed.
C PRESET/TUNING (EDIT), SEARCH MODE
*
Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
(LEVEL) between selecting preset station numbers and
tuning.
D STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is
selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are
output directly from their respective speakers without
effect processing.
E FM/AM, XM
*
Switches the reception band when the unit is in tuner
mode.
F PROGRAM
Use to select sound field programs or adjust the bass/treble
balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL).
G TONE CONTROL
Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left and
right, center, presence and subwoofer channels (see
page 31).
H INPUT MODE
Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of
signals received when one component is connected to two
or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 37).
I INPUT selector
Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.
J MULTI CH INPUT
Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes
priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input
selector buttons on the remote control).
K PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 35).
■ U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe
models only
L ZONE ON/OFF buttons
MAIN
Switches this unit’s operation to control the component in
the main room (see page 84).
ZONE 2
Switches this unit’s operation to control the component in
the second room (Zone 2) (see page 84).
*
Available only when the unit is in the XM Satellite Radio
mode (see page 45).
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
6
This section describes the function of each control on the
remote control used to control this unit. To operate other
components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on
page 75.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
2 TRANSMIT indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.
3 STANDBY
Sets this unit in the standby mode.
4 SYSTEM POWER
Turns on the power of this unit.
5 Input selector buttons
Select the input source and change the control area.
6 Display window
Shows the name of the selected source component that
you can control.
7 LEVEL, BAND
Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the
level.
Switches the reception band when the unit is in tuner
mode.
8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i /ENTER
Use to select and adjust sound field program parameters or
SET MENU items.
Press j / i to select a preset station group (A to E) when
the unit is in tuner mode.
Press u / d to select a preset station number (1 to 8)
when the unit is in tuner mode.
9 RETURN, MEMORY*
Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the
SET MENU parameters.
0 Sound field program/numeric buttons
Use to select sound field programs.
Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when the
unit is in tuner mode.
Use SELECT to playback 2-channel sources in multiple
channel format (see page 34).
Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1-channel
playback of multi-channel software (see page 33).
Use PURE DIRECT to turn on or off PURE DIRECT
mode (see page 35).
A SPEAKERS A/B
Use to turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to
the A and/or B terminal on the rear panel each time the
corresponding button is pressed.
B RE-NAME
Use to change the input source name in the display
window (see page 80).
Remote control
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE
A-E/CAT.
BAND
TV INPUT
TV VOL
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
PURE DIRECT
EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT
NIGHT
SPEAKERSAB
EFFECTMEMORY
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
B
C
D
E
F
H
J
K
L
M
N
O
I
8
9
7
0
2
3
4
1
6
5
G
A
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
7
INTRODUCTION
C CLEAR
Use to clear functions acquired when using the learn and
rename features, or setting remote control codes (see
page 81).
D LEARN
Use to set up manufacturer codes or program functions
from other remote controls (see pages 76 and 79).
E SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer.
F INPUT MODE
Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of
signals received when one component is connected to two
or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 37).
G MULTI CH IN
Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external
decoder (etc.).
H SELECT k/n
Selects another component that you can control
independently of the input component selected with the
input selector buttons.
I AMP
Selects the AMP mode. You must select the AMP mode to
control the main unit.
J VOL +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level.
K MUTE
Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to
the previous volume level.
L SET MENU, SRCH MODE
*
Activates the SET MENU function.
M ON SCREEN
Selects the display mode of the on-screen display (OSD)
this unit sends to your video monitor.
N STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is
selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are
output directly from their respective speakers without
effect processing.
O NIGHT, ENT.
*
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 35).
*
Available only when the unit is in the XM Satellite Radio
mode (see page 45).
The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on the main unit during operation.
■ Handling the remote control
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote
control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the
following types of conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperature, such as near a heater or
stove
– extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
Using the remote control
DISPLAY
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
LEVEL
CATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
XIM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
30 30
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
CLEAR
LEARN
POWER SLEEP
STANDBY
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
POWER
TV
POWER
AV
AMP
REC
DISC SKIP
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
TITLE
BAND
TV INPUT
SRCH MODE
TV VOL
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
MENU
A-E/CAT.
MUTE
CH
TV MUTE
ENTER
CH
PRESET PRESET
RETURN
TV VOL
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
EFFECTMEMORY
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN MOVIE
12
34
56
8
STANDARD
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
PURE DIRECT
7
90
ENT.
+10
NIGHT
A
SPEAKERS
B
CHP/INDEX
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8
1 Decoder indicators
When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective
indicator lights up.
2 VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 36).
3 SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 31).
4 Input source indicators
A cursor lights to show the current input source.
5 Sound field indicators
Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields.
6 CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field
program.
7 YPAO indicator
Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the
auto setup speaker settings are used without any
modifications.
8 AUTO indicator
Lights up when this unit is in automatic tuning mode.
9 TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station.
0 STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an
FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.
A MEMORY indicator
Flashes to show that a station can be stored.
B MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on.
C VOLUME level indication
Indicates the current volume level.
D PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) digital audio signals.
E STANDARD
Lights up when a decoder is selected (see page 34).
F NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select night listening mode.
G SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.
Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are
selected.
H Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
I HiFi DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field
program.
J Multi-information display
Shows the current sound field program name and other
information when adjusting or changing settings.
Front panel display
PHONOCDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
96
24
q
PL
q
EX
q
PL
MATRIX DISCRETE
SILENT CINEMA
NIGHT
ZONE2STANDARD
HD AUTO
YPAO
PS
PS
HOLD
HOLD
RT CT
RT CT
EON
EON
PTY
PTY
PTY
PTY
TUNED STEREO MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
q
PL x
A B
SP
mS
dB
ft
dB
96/24
HiFi DSP
LFE
LCR
SL SB SR
q
DIGITAL
t
123456789 A B C0
O
IJ M
KNLED
FH
G
(U.S.A., Canada, Australia,
U.K. and Europe models
only)
Presence DSP sound field
Listening position
Left surround
DSP sound field
Right surround
DSP sound field
Surround back DSP sound field
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
9
INTRODUCTION
K SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on.
L 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
M LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.
N Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of the current digital
input signal.
■ U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe
model only
O ZONE 2 indicator
Lights up when Zone 2 power is on.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
10
1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks
See page 19 for details.
2 Audio component jacks
See page 19 for connection information.
3 Video component jacks
See pages 16 and 18 for connection information.
4 Antenna terminals
(except U.K. model)
See page 21 for connection information.
5 PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals
(U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe
models)
PRESENCE speaker terminals
(other models)
See page 13 for connection information.
6 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
(U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models
only)
See page 83 for details.
7 XM jack
See page 45 for connection information.
8 CONTROL OUT jack
(U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K. and Europe
models only)
This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use.
9 AC OUTLET(S)
Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see
page 22).
0 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
See pages 16, 18 and 19 for details.
A MULTI CH INPUT jacks
See page 17 for connection information.
B ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks
(U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models
only)
These jacks output analog signals only. See page 83 for
details.
TUNER INPUT jacks
(U.K. model only)
C PRE OUT jacks
See page 20 for connection information.
D Speaker terminals
See page 13 for connection information.
■ General models only
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
See page 22 for details.
Rear panel
GND
AUDIO AUDIO
DIGITAL
INPUT
DVD
DVD
CD
COAXIAL
DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
BACK
SURROUND
FRONT
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
MD
/CD-R
CD
PHONO
DVD
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
DTV
/CBL
DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR PB Y
75Ω UNBAL.
FM
ANT
AM
ANTGND
TUNER
DTV/
CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT
IN
DVR/
VCR 2
OUT
CENTER
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
MULTI CH INPUT
ZONE 2
OUTPUT
VIDEO S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
FRONT
SUB
WOOFER
FRONT
A
B
CENTER SINGLE
PRE OUT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
PRESENCE/
ZONE 2
OUT
IN
REMOTE
CONTROL
OUT
AC OUTLETS
SWITCHED
+12V
15mA MAX.
SPEAKERS
SURROUND
CENTER SURROUND BACK
OPTICAL
12 3 48965
0A B C D
XM
7
(U.S.A. model)
SPEAKER SETUP
11
PREPARATION
The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R
*
speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP
and multi-channel audio sources.
*
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union).
Front speakers (FR and FL)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from
the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker
from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front
face of the center speaker with the front face of your video
monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front
speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as
directly over or under it.
Surround speakers (SR and SL)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening
position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above
the floor.
Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL)
The surround back speakers supplement the surround
speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back
transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the
listening position and at the same height as the surround
speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in)
apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width
as the front speakers.
Subwoofer
The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active
Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only
for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,
but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and
DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so
critical, because low bass sounds are not highly
directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the
front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the
room to reduce wall reflections.
Presence speakers (PR and PL)
Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front
speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA
DSP (see page 56). These effects include sounds that
filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the
screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place
these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 - 1 m
(1 - 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly
inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor.
SPEAKER SETUP
Speaker placement
60˚
30˚
PL
PR
SBR
SBL
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
30 cm (12 in) or more
1.8 m (6 ft)
1.8 m (6 ft)
12
SPEAKER SETUP
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),
“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are
faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the
polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound
will be unnatural and lack bass.
• If you will use 4 or 6 ohm speakers, be sure to
set this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 4
ohms before using (see page 23).
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the
power of this unit is off.
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do
not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This
could damage this unit and/or speakers.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of
speakers still creates the interference with the monitor,
place the speakers away from the monitor.
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables
running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped
differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.
Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)
terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain
cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8") of
insulation from the end of each speaker
cable.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together
to prevent short circuits.
3 Unscrew the knob.
4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side
of each terminal.
5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
■ Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or
PRESENCE speaker terminals
1 Open the tab.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each
terminal.
3 Return the tab to secure the wire.
■ Banana plug connections
(With the exception of U.K. and Europe models)
First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug
connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.
y
You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 and
PRESENCE speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one
banana plug connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not
attempt to close the tabs after connecting the banana plugs.
Speaker connections
CAUTION
10 mm (3/8")
1
2
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
3
4
5
2
1
3
Banana plug
(With the exception of U.K. and
Europe models)
13
SPEAKER SETUP
PREPARATION
FRONT
SUB
WOOFER
FRONT
A
B
CENTER SINGLE
PRE OUT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
PRESENCE/
ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
SURROUND
CENTER SURROUND BACK
231
6 7 10
98
45
Subwoofer
system
Center
speaker
Front speakers (A)
Surround back
speakers
LeftRight
LeftRight
Surround speakers
Front
speakers
(B)
(U.S.A. model)
LeftRight
LeftRight
Presence speakers
You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously.
• The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only
operate when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES or Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder is turned on.
• The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields
are selected.
14
SPEAKER SETUP
■ FRONT terminals
Connect one or two speaker systems (6, 7) to these
terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it
to the FRONT A or B terminals.
■ CENTER terminals
Connect a center speaker (8) to these terminals.
■ SURROUND terminals
Connect surround speakers (4, 5) to these terminals.
■ SUBWOOFER jack
Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (1), such as
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System, to this jack.
■ SURROUND BACK terminals
Connect surround back speakers (9, 10) to these terminals.
If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it
to the left (L) terminals.
■ PRESENCE terminals
Connect presence speakers (2, 3) to these terminals.
*
If you are using either the U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K. or
Europe model, you can also use these speakers as Zone 2
speakers (see page 72).
1
6
7
8
9
2
3
5
4
10
Speaker layout
CONNECTIONS
15
PREPARATION
Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains
power until all connections between components are
complete.
■ Cable indications
■ Analog jacks
You can input analog signals from audio components by
connecting audio pin cable to the analog jacks on this unit.
Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the
left jacks.
■ Digital jacks
This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital
signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You
can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both
the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to
the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital
input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital
signals.
This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus
audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the
analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the
digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack.
Dust protection cap
Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect
the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are
not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in
place. This cap protects the jack from dust.
■ Video jacks
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor.
The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks on this unit
are automatically converted for output through the
VIDEO jacks. When VIDEO CONV. is set to ON (see
page 71), signals input through the VIDEO jacks can be
output through the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks. Likewise, signals input through the S VIDEO jacks
can also be output through the COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks.
VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals.
S VIDEO jacks
For S-Video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color
reproduction.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color difference (P
B, PR) to provide the best quality in
picture reproduction.
When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO
jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority.
CONNECTIONS
Before connecting components
Note
CAUTION
S
V
O
V
V
V
L
R
C
Y
P
B
PR
left analog cables
right analog cables
optical cables
coaxial cables
video cables
S-video cables
For analog signals
For digital signals
For video signals
component video cables
Note
VIDEO
S VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
S VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Signal flow inside this unit
Only when VIDEO CONV. is set to ON
(see page 71).
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
16
CONNECTIONS
■ Connections for DVD playback
Be sure to connect your video source components in the same way you connect your video monitor to this unit if VIDEO CONV. (see
page 71) is set to OFF. For example, if you connect your video monitor to this unit using a VIDEO connection, connect your video
source components to this unit using the VIDEO connections. (Even when V CONV. is set to OFF, S-video signals input from your
video source component are automatically converted to composite signals in this unit.)
Connecting video components
Note
VIDEO
AUDIO
DIGITAL
INPUT
DVD
DVD
COAXIAL
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR PB Y
VIDEO S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
S
P
R PB Y
V
LRC
O
DVD player
Video
monitor
(U.S.A. model)
Optical out
Video out
Audio out
Video in
Coaxial out
17
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
This unit is equipped with 8 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND, left and
right SURROUND BACK and SUB WOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external
decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to
match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
• When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you
cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
• When headphones are used, only front left and right channels are output.
Notes
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
MULTI CH INPUT
LRLR
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
BACK
SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
MULTI CH INPUT
LR LRLR
Multi-format player/
External decoder
For 6-channel input
Front
out
Surround
out
Subwoofer
out
Center
out
Multi-format player/
External decoder
Front
out
Surround
out
Subwoofer
out
Center
out
Surround
back out
For 8-channel input
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
18
CONNECTIONS
■ Connections for other video components
• Be sure to connect your video source components in the same way you connect your video monitor to this unit if VIDEO CONV. (see
page 71) is set to OFF. For example, if you connect your video monitor to this unit using a VIDEO connection, connect your video
source components to this unit using the VIDEO connections.
• Converted video signals are only output to MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording, you must make the same type of video
connections (i.e., S-video) between each component.
■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a
game console or video camera, to this unit.
Notes
AUDIO
DIGITAL
INPUT
COAXIAL
DTV/CBL
VIDEO
DTV/
CBL
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR PB Y
DTV/
CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT
O
LR
LR LR
MONITOR
OUT
S
V
S
V
V
S
P
R PB Y
VIDEO S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
Cable TV or
satellite tuner
DVD recorder
or VCR
Audio out
Video out
Optical out
Audio out
Video out
Video inAudio in
(U.S.A. model)
Video
monitor
Video in
or or
VIDEOS VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
O
V
S
L
R
Game
console or
video
camera
Video out
Audio out L
Audio out R
Optical out
S-video out
19
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
■ Connections for audio components
■ Connecting a turntable
PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM
or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with
a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting
transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to
these jacks.
y
Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in
the signal. However you may hear less noise without the
connection to the GND terminal for some record players.
Connecting audio components
GND
AUDIO AUDIO
DIGITAL
INPUT
CD
COAXIAL
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
MD/
CD-R
CD
PHONO
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
L
R
L
R
O
L
R
O
LR
C
CD player
MD recorder or
tape deck
(U.S.A. model)
Coaxial out
Audio out
Audio in
Optical in
Audio out
Turntable
GND
Audio out
Optical out
20
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting to an external amplifier
If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,
or want to use another amplifier, connect an external
amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows.
• When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for
output to an external amplifier, do not make connections to the
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the
amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum.
• The signals output through the FRONT PRE OUT and
CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE
CONTROL settings.
• If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SP B is set to ZONE B (see
page 72), signals will only be output from the FRONT PRE
OUT jacks.
1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Front channel line output jacks.
2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Surround channel line output jacks.
3 CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel line output jack.
4 SURROUND BACK PRE OUT jacks
Surround back or presence channel line output jacks.
5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
to this jack.
• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the
corresponding speaker terminals.
• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on
the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level
using the remote control (see “Manually adjusting speaker
levels” on page 60).
• Some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE
OUT jack depending on the SPEAKER SET (see page 64) and
LFE/BASS OUT (see page 65) settings.
Notes
Notes
FRONT
SUB
WOOFER
CENTER SINGLE
PRE OUT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
123
5
4
21
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are included with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the
designated terminals.
■ Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it
to the terminals on this unit.
2 Press and hold the tab to
insert the AM loop antenna
lead wires into the AM ANT
and GND terminals.
3 Orient the AM loop antenna
for the best reception.
■ FREQUENCY STEP (General model only)
Be sure to set the frequency step according to the
frequency spacing in your area (see page 73).
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an
outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest
authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor
antennas.
Connecting the FM and AM antennas
75Ω UNBAL.
FM
ANT
TUNER
AM loop antenna
(included)
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum
interference, connect the antenna
GND
terminal to a good earth ground. A good
earth ground is a metal stake driven into
moist earth.
Indoor FM antenna
(included)
Notes
22
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting the AC power cord
Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.
■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.K. and Australia models ................................... 1 outlet
Korea model ..............................................................None
Other models ........................................................2 outlets
Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your
other components to this unit. Power to the AC
OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON
(or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). The outlet(s)
supply power to any connected component whenever this
unit is turned on. For information on the maximum power
(total power consumption of components), see
“SPECIFICATIONS” on page 102.
■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC main supply. Voltages are:
Asia model .........................220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
General model .....110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
■ Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from
being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC
wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one
week, the stored data will be lost.
Connecting the power supply cord
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model)
23
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
If you are using 4 or 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to
4 or 6 ohms as follows before turning on the power.
Be sure this unit is in the standby mode.
1 Turn off the power to this unit, and while
holding down STRAIGHT (EFFECT), press
STANDBY/ON.
This unit turns on, and “SP IMP.” appears in the front
panel display.
2 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) repeatedly to
select “4 Ω MIN”.
3 Press STANDBY/ON to turn off the power.
The setting you made is reflected the next time this
unit’s power is turned on.
When all connections are complete, turn on the power of
this unit.
1 Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER on
the remote control) to turn on the power of
this unit.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
Speaker impedance setting
CAUTION
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
STANDBY
/ON
SP IMP.
While holding
down, press
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
STANDBY
/ON
Turning on the power
DISPLAY
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
LEVEL
CATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
XIM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
1
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
1
(U.S.A. model)
STANDBY
/ON
SYSTEM
POWER
or
Front panel
Remote control
AUTO SETUP
24
This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room
Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you
avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and
achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied
optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound
your speakers produce in your actual listening
environment.
• Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be
output during the auto setup procedure.
• If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen,
follow the troubleshooting on page 28.
YPAO performs the following checks and makes
appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible
sound from your system.
WIRING:
Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of
each speaker.
SIZE:
Checks the speakers frequency response and sets the
crossover/high cut frequency for the subwoofer to
improve the sound relationship between the speakers and
the subwoofer.
DISTANCE:
Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening
position and adjusts the delay of each channel so that the
sound from each speaker reaches the listening position at
the same time. Also checks the phase of each speaker.
EQUALIZING:
Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric
equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and
create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly
important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers
for some channels or have a room with unique sonic
characteristics.
YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three
parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the
seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly
precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics.
LEVEL:
Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each
speaker.
1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
• After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be sure to
disconnect the optimizer microphone.
• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat.
– Keep it away from direct sunlight.
– Do not place it on top of this unit.
2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat
level surface with the omni-directional
microphone head upward, at your normal
listening position.
If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer
mic at the same height as your ears would be when
you are seated in your listening position.
AUTO SETUP
Introduction
Notes
Optimizer microphone setup
Notes
LEVEL
CATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
FM/AM
XIM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH
h
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
(U.S.A. model)
Optimizer microphone position
25
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible
during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too
much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory.
y
If your subwoofer has adjustable volume and crossover/high cut
frequency controls, set the volume between 9 and 11 o’clock (as
viewed on a conventional clockface) and set the crossover/high
cut frequency to the maximum.
1 Switch on this unit and your video monitor.
Make sure the OSD is displayed.
2 Press AMP.
3 Press SET MENU.
y
When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, you cannot select
any other SET MENU items (see page 60).
4 Press u / d to select AUTO SETUP, then
press ENTER.
5 Press u / d to select SETUP, then press j / i
to select the desired setting.
AUTO To perform the auto setup procedure
(YPAO).
RELOAD To reload the last auto setup (YPAO)
settings to override any manual
changes.
UNDO To undo the last auto setup (YPAO) and
restore the previous settings.
DEFAULT To restore the factory preset (default)
setup parameters.
y
You can choose RELOAD or UNDO only if you have
already performed the auto setup procedure.
6 Press d to select “START”, then press
ENTER to start the setup procedure.
The screen changes as follows.
Starting the setup
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN
MAX
Subwoofer
AMP
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
SET MENU
.;AUTOSETUP
;MANUALSETUP
;SIGNAL INFO.
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
1 AUTO:MENU
. SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO
START
Automatic
processing
of all items
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
p
p
1 AUTO:MENU
SETUP;;; AUTO
. START
Automatic
processing
of all items
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Start
p
p
;;;;;;;
.WARNING (3)
RESULT
SP : 5/4/0.1
DIST: 10.0/ 12.0ft
LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB
.>SET CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
RESULT:EXIT
2 AUTO:CHECK
WIRING
INITIALZING
.
SIZE/DISTANCE.
EQUALIZING.
LEVEL.
CHECK CH=CENTER
|||||;;;;;;;;
[]:Exit
p
26
AUTO SETUP
The results displayed in the RESULT:EXIT screen
are as follows:
SP The number of connected speakers
displayed in the order:
Front/Back/Subwoofer
DIST The distance of the speakers from this
unit displayed in the order:
Closest speaker distance/Farthest
speaker distance
LVL The speaker output level displayed in
the order:
Lowest output level/Highest output
level
• If you selected AUTO in step 5, “WAITING”
appears when the auto setup procedure is started,
then loud test tones are output from each speaker in
turn.
• If you selected DEFAULT, RELOAD or UNDO in
step 5, no test tones are output.
• If an ERROR screen appears, see “If an error
screen appears” on page 26.
• If a WARNING screen appears, see “If a warning
screen appears” on page 27.
y
You can display the detailed result information by using d and
ENTER to select “RESULT”. In the detailed result information
screen, you can switch information by pressing
u / d / j / i.
7 Press j / i to select SET or CANCEL, then
press ENTER to return to the SET MENU
screen.
SET To apply the auto setup (YPAO)
settings.
CANCEL To cancel the auto setup (YPAO)
without making any changes.
y
If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually adjust
each setup parameter, use the manual setup parameters (see page
52).
• If E-10 appears during testing, restart the procedure from step 3.
• To cancel the auto setup procedure before completion, press u.
■ If an error screen appears
Use u / d / j / i to select RETRY or EXIT, then press
ENTER.
RETRY To retry the auto setup procedure.
EXIT To exit auto setup.
Notes
WARNING (3)
RESULT
SP : 5/4/0.1
DIST: 10.0/ 12.0ft
LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB
.>SET CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
RESULT:EXIT
ERROR
.E-9:USER CANCEL
.
.Don't operate
.any function.
.>RETRYEXIT
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
27
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
■ If a warning screen appears
1 Press ENTER to display detailed information
about the warning.
Press j / i to switch between warning messages.
For details about each message, see page 29.
y
• Warnings let you know about potential problems detected
during auto setup. Warnings will not cancel the auto setup.
• The number of warnings is displayed to the right of
“WARNING”.
• When the warning is not applicable to a speaker, “– –” is
displayed.
2 When you are finished, press ENTER to
return to the RESULT:EXIT screen.
Continue from step 7 on page 26.
• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your
listening environment, perform auto setup again to re-calibrate
your system.
• Depending on listening environments, SWFR PHASE:REV
appears in AUTO:CHECK and SUBWOOFER PHASE
parameter in the SETMENU (see page 66) is automatically set
to REVERSE. To select the desired setting, change the
SUBWOOFER PHASE parameter in the SETMENU.
• In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be longer
than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your
subwoofer.
Notes
WARNING:W-1
.<OUT OF PHASE>
.Reverse Channel
.FL __
.CENTER
.PL PR
.SL SR
.SBL SBR
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
.WARNING (3)
RESULT
SP : 5/4/0.1
DIST: 10.0/ 12.0ft
LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB
.>SET CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
RESULT:EXIT
W-1 example screen
28
AUTO SETUP
■ Troubleshooting for auto setup procedure
Before auto setup
Errors during auto setup
Error message Cause Remedy
Connect MIC
Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
Unplug HP
Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1:NO FRONT SP
Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not
detected.
• Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A/B.
• Check the front left and right speaker connections.
• Turn on the power to the external amplifier (when the
front speaker signals are output from an external
amplifier).
E-2:NO SURR. SP
Only one surround channel signal is detected. • Check the surround speaker connections.
E-3:NO PRES. SP
Only one presence channel signal is detected. • Check the presence speaker connections.
E-4:SBR->SBL
Only right surround back channel signal is
detected.
• Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT
SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you
only have one surround back speaker.
E-5:NOISY
Background noise is too loud. • Try the auto setup procedure in a quiet environment.
• Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners
(etc.) or move them away from the optimizer
microphone.
E-6:CHECK SUR.
Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected,
though surround L/R speakers are not.
• Connect surround speakers when you use (a)
surround back speaker(s).
• Check the surround speaker connections.
E-7:NO MIC
The optimizer microphone was unplugged
during the auto setup procedure.
• Do not touch the optimizer microphone during the
auto setup procedure.
E-8:NO SIGNAL
The optimizer microphone does not detect test
tones.
• Check the microphone setting.
• Check the speaker connections and placement.
E-9:USER CANCEL
The auto setup procedure was cancelled due to
user activity.
• Perform the auto setup procedure again. Do not adjust
VOLUME (etc.) during the auto setup procedure.
E-10:INTERNAL
ERROR
A DSP communication error or hangup
occurred.
• Perform the auto setup procedure again.
29
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
Warnings after auto setup
Press j / i to display detailed information about individual warnings.
• If the ERROR or WARNING screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then perform the auto setup procedure again.
• If warning W-1 appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.
• If warning W-2 or W-3 appears, no corrections are made.
• If error E-10 occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1:OUT OF PHASE
Speaker polarity is not correct. This message
may appear depending on the speakers even
when the speakers are connected correctly.
• Check the speaker connections for proper polarity
(+ / –).
W-2:OVER 24m
The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is 24 m (80 ft) or more.
• Move the speaker closer to the listening position.
• Check the speaker connections for proper polarity
(+ / –).
W-3:LEVEL ERROR
The difference of volume level among speakers
is excessive. (No level correction is made.)
• Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers
are set in locations with similar conditions.
• Check the speaker connections for proper polarity
(+ / –).
• Use speakers of similar quality and efficiency.
PLAYBACK
30
1 Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER on
the remote control) to turn on the power.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
3 Press SPEAKERS A or B (or press AMP to
select the AMP mode, then press SPEAKERS
A or B on the remote control).
Each press turns the respective speakers on or off.
4 Select the input source.
Rotate INPUT (or press one of the input selector
buttons on the remote control) to select the input you
desire.
The current input source name and input mode appear
in the front panel display and video monitor for a few
seconds.
5 Start playback or select a broadcast station
on the source component.
Refer to the operating instructions for the component.
6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.
PLAYBACK
Basic operations
DISPLAY
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
LEVEL
CATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
XIM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH
h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
1 7 43
6
REC
AUDI O
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE
A-E/CAT.
BAND
TV INPUT
TV VOL
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
PURE DIRECT
EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT
NIGHT
SPEAKERSAB
EFFECTMEMORY
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
1
6
7
3
4
3
(U.S.A. model)
STANDBY
/ON
SYSTEM
POWER
Front panel Remote control
or
SPEAKERS
B
A
0
A SPEAKERS B
9
or
Front panel
Remote control
AMP
INPUT
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
Front panel
Remote control
or
CD PHONOTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
Selected input source
Input mode
VOLUME
VOL
or
Remote control
Front panel
31
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
7 Select a sound field program if desired.
Use PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP
mode, then press one of the sound field program
buttons) to select a sound field program. See page 56
for details about sound field programs.
■ To listen with headphones (“SILENT
CINEMA”)
“SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT
CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect
headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to
CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When
activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in
the front panel display.
• This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI
CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
• “SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when PURE DIRECT or
the 2ch Stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode.
■ To adjust the tone
You can adjust the tonal quality
of your front left and right,
center, and subwoofer speakers or
headphones (when connected).
Press TONE CONTROL on the
front panel repeatedly to select
TREBLE or BASS, then rotate
PROGRAM to the right or left to
increase or decrease.
• Select TREBLE to adjust the
high frequency response.
• Select BASS to adjust the low
frequency response.
y
Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective during playback in the PURE
DIRECT mode, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected
(page 35).
• When TONE BYPASS is set to “AUTO” (page 68), and BASS
and TREBLE are set to 0 dB, audio output automatically
bypasses this unit's tone control circuitry.
■ To mute the sound
Press MUTE on the remote control.
The MUTE indicator blinks in the
front panel display.
To resume the audio output, press
MUTE again (or press VOL –/+).
The MUTE indicator disappears
from the display.
y
You can adjust the muting level (see page 68).
Notes
PROGRAM
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
PURE DIRECT
EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT
NIGHT
SPEAKERSAB
CHP/INDEX
AMP
Remote control
Front panel
or
Notes
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
MUTE
32
PLAYBACK
■ Selecting MULTI CH INPUT
Press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the
remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in
the front panel display and video monitor.
MULTI CH INPUT
When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display,
no other source can be played. To select another input source with
INPUT (or one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH
INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) to turn off
“MULTI CH INPUT” in the front panel display.
■ Playing video sources in the
background
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
Use the input selector buttons on the remote
control to select a video source, then select an
audio source.
If you want to enjoy audio from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
together with a video source, first select the video source, then
press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote
control).
■ Front panel operation
Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program.
The name of the selected program appears in the front
panel display and video monitor.
Note
Note
MULTI CH
INPUT
MULTI CH IN
Front panel
Remote control
or
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
Audio sources
Video sources
Selecting sound field programs
DISPLAY
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
LEVEL
CATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
XIM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH
h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
PROGRAM
(U.S.A. model)
CD PHONOTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
HiFi DSP
L R
TV Sports
Program name
PROGRAM
33
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Remote control operation
Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press
one of the sound field program buttons to select
the desired program.
The name of the selected program appears in the front
panel display.
y
Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference,
and not on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with that source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when MULTI CH
INPUT is selected.
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/
24 signals) will be sampled down to 48 kHz, then sound field
programs will be applied.
■ Enjoying multi-channel software
If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature
to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel
sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX
or DTS-ES decoders.
Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press
EXTD SUR. on the remote control to switch
between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel playback.
To select a decoder, press j / i repeatedly when
PLIIxMusic (etc.) is displayed.
Auto (AUTO)
When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is
input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing
back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels.
If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in
the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/
7.1 channels.
Decoders (select with j / i)
You can select from the following decoders depending on
the format of the software you are playing.
PLIIxMovie
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1
channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder.
PLIIxMusic
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1
channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder.
EX/ES
For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels
using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.
DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the
DTS-ES decoder.
EX
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1
channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.
Off (OFF)
Decoders are not used to create 6.1/7.1 channels.
y
When “SUR. B SP” is set to SMLx1 or LRGx1 (see page 65), the
surround back channel will be output from the left SURROUND
BACK speaker terminals.
Notes
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
SET MENU
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE
A-E/CAT.
BAND
TV INPUT
TV VOL
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
PURE DIRECT
EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT
NIGHT
SPEAKERSAB
EFFECTMEMORY
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
Sound field
program
buttons
AMP
CD PHONOTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
HiFi DSP
L R
TV Sports
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
PURE DIRECT
EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT
NIGHT
SPEAKERSAB
CHP/INDEX
AMP
Program name
7
EXTD SUR.
AMP
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
34
PLAYBACK
• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag)
which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these
kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select a decoder (PLIIx Movie,
PLIIx Music, EX/ES or EX) manually.
• 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD SUR. is
pressed in the following cases:
– When “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 64) or “SUR. B L/R SP” (see
page 65) is set to NONE.
– When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is
being played.
– When the source being played does not contain surround left
and right channel signals.
– When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
– When “2ch Stereo” or PURE DIRECT is selected.
• When the power of this unit is turned off, this setting will be
reset to AUTO.
• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R
SP” is set to NONE (see page 65).
• PLIIxMovie cannot be selected when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to
SMLx1 or LRGx1 (see page 65).
■ Enjoying 2-channel software in surround
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back on multiple channels.
Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press
STANDARD on the remote control to switch
between the SUR. STANDARD and SUR.
ENHANCED programs.
Or press MOVIE to select the MOVIE THEATER
program.
Press SELECT on the remote control to select
the decoder.
You can select from the following modes depending on the
type of software you are playing and your personal
preference.
When you select the SUR. STANDARD program:
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.
PLII Game
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.
PLIIx Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.
PLIIx Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.
PLIIx Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie software.
Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music software.
When you select the SUR. ENHANCED or MOVIE
THEATER program:
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.
PLIIx Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie software.
y
You can also select a decoder by pressing j / i on the remote
control when the decoder type is displayed in the short message
display.
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R
SP” is set to NONE (see page 59).
Notes
AMP
5
STANDARD
4
MOVIE
6
SELECT
Note
35
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound
(PURE DIRECT)
PURE DIRECT allows you to bypass this unit’s decoders
and DSP processors, and turn off the video circuitry and
front panel display to enjoy pure high fidelity sound from
analog and PCM sources.
Press PURE DIRECT (or press AMP to select the
AMP mode, then press PURE DIRECT on the
remote control) to activate pure direct.
The indicator around the front panel button lights up.
y
The front panel display switches on momentarily when an
operation is performed.
To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again.
The indicator around the front panel button goes out and
the previous settings are restored.
• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in
this mode.
• When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input,
this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog
input.
• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.
• The following operations are not possible during PURE
DIRECT operation:
– switching the sound field program
– displaying the OSD
– adjusting SET MENU parameters
– all video functions (video conversion etc.)
• PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is
set to the standby mode.
■ Night listening modes
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either
NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the
type of material you are playing.
Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press
NIGHT repeatedly on the remote control to select
cinema or music.
When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in
the front panel display lights up.
• Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.
• Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources
to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
• Select OFF if you do not want to use this function.
Press j / i to adjust the effect level while
NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed.
This adjusts the level of compression.
• Select MIN for minimum compression.
• Select MID for standard compression.
• Select MAX for maximum compression.
y
NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored
independently.
• You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT
or MULTI CH INPUT (even though the NIGHT indicator lights
up when PURE DIRECT is selected).
• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending
on the input source and surround sound settings you use.
Notes
PURE DIRECT
8
PURE DIRECT
Front panel Remote control
AMP
or
Notes
ENT.
NIGHT
CHP/INDEX
AMP
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
Remote control
Effect.Lvl:MID
36
PLAYBACK
■ Downmixing to 2 channels
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback even from multi-
channel sources.
Rotate PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the
AMP mode, then press STEREO on the remote
control) to select 2ch Stereo.
2ch Stereo
y
You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or
BOTH is selected in “BASS OUT”.
■ Listening to unprocessed input signals
In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are
output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-
channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate
channels without any additional effect processing.
Press STRAIGHT to select STRAIGHT.
STRAIGHT
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) again so that “STRAIGHT”
disappears from the display when you want to turn the
sound effect back on.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
If you set “SUR. L/R SP” to NONE (see page 64), Virtual
CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you
select a CINEMA DSP sound field program.
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when “SUR. L/R
SP” is set to NONE (see page 64) in the following cases:
– When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
– When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
STEREO
1
Front panel
or
PROGRAM
Remote control
AMP
Note
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
Front panel
Remote control
or
37
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the
following to select the type of input signals you want to
use.
1 Rotate INPUT (or press one of the input
selector buttons on the remote control) to
select the input source.
2 Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode.
In most cases, use AUTO.
AUTO Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
1) Digital signals
*
2) Analog signals
DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in
DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no
sound is output.
ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no
analog signals are input, no sound is
output.
* If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the
decoder automatically switches to the appropriate
decoder.
y
You can adjust the default input mode of this unit (see page 70).
• When playing a DTS-CD/LD, be sure to set the INPUT MODE
to DTS.
• If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any
way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you
make a digital connection between this unit and the player
depending on the player.
■ Displaying information about the input
source
You can display the type, format and sampling frequency
of the current input signal.
1 Select the input source.
2 Press STRAIGHT.
STRAIGHT
Selecting input modes
INPUT
Front panel
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
or
Remote control
INPUT MODE
CD PHONOTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
Input modeInput source
Front panel
or
INPUT MODE
Remote control
Notes
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
38
PLAYBACK
3 Press u / d to display the following
information about the input signal.
(Format) Signal format display. When the unit
cannot detect a digital signal it
automatically switches to analog input.
in Number of source channels in the input
signal. For example, a multi-channel
soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2
surround channels and LFE, is
displayed as “3/2/LFE”.
fs Sampling frequency. When the unit is
unable to detect the sampling
frequency “Unknown” appears.
rate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to
detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears.
flg Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby
Digital signals that cue this unit to
automatically switch decoders.
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
FM/AM TUNING
39
BASIC
OPERATION
There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
■ Automatic tuning
1 Rotate INPUT to select TUNER as the input
source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the
front panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn the colon (:) off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to
begin automatic tuning.
Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l
to tune into a lower frequency.
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
lights up and the frequency of the received station is
shown in the front panel display.
FM/AM TUNING
Automatic and manual tuning
DISPLAY
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
LEVEL
CATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
XIM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH
h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
3 312 4
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
FM/AM
or
AM
FM
DISPLAY
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
AUTO
Lights up
SEARCH MODE
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
TUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
R
/VCR2
AUTO
TUNED
A
SP
TUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
R
/VCR2
AUTO
TUNED
A
SP
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
40
FM/AM TUNING
■ Manual tuning
If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,
tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an FM station
will automatically switch the tuner to monaural reception
to increase the signal quality.
1 Select TUNER and the reception band
following steps 1 and 2 as described in
“Automatic tuning”.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the AUTO indicator disappears from
the front panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn the colon (:) off.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to tune
into the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to
continue searching.
■ Automatically presetting FM stations
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations. This function enables this unit to
automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals,
and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through
E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any
preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.
1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the
front panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn the colon (:) off.
DISPLAY
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
AUTO
Disappears
SEARCH MODE
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
TUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
R
/VCR2
AUTO
TUNED
A
SP
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
Presetting stations
DISPLAY
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
LEVEL
CATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
XIM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
231
(U.S.A. model)
FM/AM
FM
DISPLAY
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
AUTO
Lights up
SEARCH MODE
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
TUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
R
/VCR2
AUTO
TUNED
A
SP
41
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
for more than 3 seconds.
The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO
indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic
presetting starts from the frequency currently
displayed and proceeds toward the higher
frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after
searching all stations.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually,
and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting
stations”.
Automatic preset tuning options:
You can select the preset number from which this unit will
store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower
frequencies.
After pressing MEMORY in step 3:
1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
to select the preset number under which the first station
will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when
stations have all been stored up to E8.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon
(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING/CH l to begin
tuning toward the lower frequencies.
■ Manually presetting stations
You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations in 5 groups,
A1 through E8) manually.
1 Tune into a station.
See page 39 for tuning instructions.
When tuned into a station, the front panel display
shows the frequency of the station received.
2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).
The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.
3 Press A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) repeatedly to select
a preset station group (A to E) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)
appears in the front panel display.
Notes
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If
so, store the stations again by using the presetting
station methods.
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
CD PHONOTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
AUTO
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
L R
DISPLAY
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
LEVEL
CATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
XIM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
43 2,5
(U.S.A. model)
CD PHONOTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
L R
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
Flashes
CATEGORY
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
CD PHONOTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
Preset group
42
FM/AM TUNING
4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to select a
preset station number (1 to 8) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
Press h to select a higher preset station number.
Press l to select a lower preset station number.
5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the
front panel while the MEMORY indicator is
flashing.
The station band and
frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset
group and number you have
selected.
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the
preset station number under which it was stored.
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, first
press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode.
1 Press A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) (or A–E/CAT. j / i on
the remote control) to select the preset
station group.
The preset group letter appears in the front panel
display and changes each time you press the button.
Notes
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
CD PHONOTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
Preset number
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
CD PHONOTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.
Selecting preset stations
DISPLAY
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
LEVEL
CATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
XIM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
2
1
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
SET MENU
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE
A-E/CAT.
BAND
TV INPUT
TV VOL
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
EFFECTMEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
2
1
(U.S.A. model)
CATEGORY
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
or
Front panel
Remote control
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
43
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
2 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
PRESET u / d on the remote control) to
select a preset station number (1 to 8).
The preset group and number appear on the front
panel display along with the station band, frequency
and the TUNED indicator lights up.
You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Select preset station “E1”.
See “Selecting preset stations”.
2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for
more than 3 seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
TUNED
A
SP
or
Front panel
Remote control
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
Exchanging preset stations
DISPLAY
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
LEVEL
CATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
XIM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
2,4 1,31,3
(U.S.A. model)
SEARCH MODE
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
TUNED MEMORY
A
SP
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
TUNED MEMORY
A
SP
CATEGORY
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
44
FM/AM TUNING
4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.
The stations stored at the two preset assignments are
exchanged.
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
TUNED
A
SP
SEARCH MODE
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
45
BASIC
OPERATION
XM Satellite Radio is the satellite radio service with
millions of listeners across the U.S. Broadcasting live
daily. XM’s channel lineup includes more than 130 digital
channels of choice from coast to coast: 68 commercial-
free music channels, featuring hip hop to opera, classical
to country, bluegrass to blues; 33 channels of premier
sports, talk, comedy, children’s and entertainment
programming; and more than 20 channels of the traffic
and weather information for major metropolitan areas
nationwide.
Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you
will need to set up an account and activate service with
XM using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check
your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio”
on page 47. For further information on XM Satellite Radio
services, see the XM Satellite Radio website at
“http://www.xmradio.com”.
• The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48
contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii).
• XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory and monthly
subscription are sold separately. For details, see the XM
Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com”.
■ Connecting the XM connect and Play
digital antenna accessory
Connect the XM connect and Play digital antenna
accessory (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear of
this unit. (For details, see the operating instructions
provided with the XM connect and Play digital antenna
accessory).
• For information on obtaining the XM connect and Play digital
antenna accessory, see the website at “http://
www.xmradio.com” or visit your local retailer that sells XM
Ready products.
• To ensure optimal reception of XM’s satellite signal, the XM
connect and Play digital antenna accessory should be placed at
or near a southerly facing window with nothing obstructing its
path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors.
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
What is XM Satellite Radio?
Notes
XM Satellite Radio connections
Notes
XM/DT
XM/DT
XM jack
46
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
This section describes the functions of each control used
for XM Satellite Radio tuning.
■ Front panel functions
The following controls are only available when the unit is in the
TUNER mode and the XM connect and Play digital antenna
accessory is connected to the XM jack on the rear of this unit (For
details, see “XM Satellite Radio connections”).
1 SEARCH MODE
Switches between the All Channel Search, Category
Search, and Preset Search modes. (For details, see “XM
Satellite Radio search modes” on page 49)
2 XM
Switches the reception band between AM, FM and XM.
3 CATEGORY
(All Channel Search mode)
Changes the channel category to next one (while staying
in the All Channel Search mode).
(Category Search mode)
Changes the channel category to next one.
(Preset Search mode)
Switches between five preset groups (A to E).
4 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
(All Channel Search mode)
Searches a radio channel within all channels. Press and
hold for quick search.
(Category Search mode)
Searches a radio channel within the selected category.
Press and hold for quick search.
(Preset Search mode)
Changes the preset number (1 to 8).
5 MEMORY
Switches the unit to the preset memory mode.
6 DISPLAY
Switches XM information such as channel number/name,
category, or artist name/song title displayed in the front
panel display and on-screen display. (For details, see
“Switching XM information in the front panel display” on
page 48).
■ Remote control functions
The following controls are only available when the unit is in the TUNER mode.
To switch to the TUNER mode, press TUNER to select TUNER as input source.
1 BAND
Switches the reception band between the currently
selected band (AM or FM) and XM.
2 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i
(All Channel Search mode)
Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the channel category.
Press PRESET/CH u / d to search a radio channel
within all channels. Press and hold for quick search.
(Category Search mode)
Press A-E/CAT.
j
/
i
to change the channel category.
Press PRESET/CH
u
/
d
to search a radio channel within
the selected category. Press and hold for quick search.
(Preset Search mode)
Press A-E/CAT.
j
/
i
to change the preset group (A to E).
Press PRESET/CH
u
/
d
to change the preset number (1 to 8).
3 MEMORY
Switches the unit to the preset memory mode.
4 Numeric buttons
(All Channel Search or Category Search mode)
Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly.
(Preset Search mode)
Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly.
5 SRCH MODE
Switches between the All Channel Search, Category
Search, and Preset Search modes. (For details, see “XM
Satellite Radio search modes” on page 49)
6 DISPLAY
Switches XM information such as channel number/name,
category, or artist name/song title displayed in the front panel
display and on-screen display. (For details, see “Switching XM
information in the front panel display” on page 48).
7 ENT.
Confirms an entered channel number during the Direct
Number Access mode (see page 51).
XM Satellite Radio functions
Note
AUTO/MAN'L MONOMAN'L/AUTO FM
LEVEL
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
XM
CATEGORY
DISPLAY
1
2
3
4
5
6
Note
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE
A-E/CAT.
BAND
TV INPUT
TV VOL
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
+10
ENT.
NIGHT
EFFECTMEMORY
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
AVTV
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO
4321
87
09
65
PURE DIRECT
EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT
SPEAKERSA B
3
1
4
5
2
6
7
47
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio
service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required.
Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and
then access the website at “http://activate.xmradio.com”
or call “1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)” with a
major credit card for signing up.
1 Rotate INPUT (or press TUNER on the remote
control) to select TUNER as the input source.
2 Press XM (or BAND on the remote control) to
select “XM” as the reception band.
If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel
display, the XM connect and Play digital antenna
accessory may not be connected to the XM jack on
the rear of this unit properly. See “XM Satellite Radio
connections” on page 45 and check the connection.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) to
select channel “0”.
You cannot select channel “0” if the All Channel Search mode
(see page 49) is not selected.
4 Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number
displayed in the front panel display and write
it down.
ID:_____________________________________
Activating XM Satellite Radio
DISPLAY
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
LEVEL
CATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
XIM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
12
INPUT
T
UN
E
R
or
Front panel
Remote control
FM/AM
XM
TITLE
L
E
V
E
L
BA
ND
or
Front panel
CDTUNER
M
D
/
C
D
-
R
DVD
D
T
V
/
CB
L
V-AUX
VCR
D
V
R
/
V
C
R
2
X
M
T
UN
E
D
A
SP
XM RADIO
Lights
Remote control
Note
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
or
Front panel
Remote control
48
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
■ Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode
1 Rotate INPUT (or press TUNER on the remote
control) to select TUNER as the input source.
2 Press XM (or BAND on the remote control) to
select “XM” as the reception band.
Information (such as channel number/name, category,
or artist name/song title) for the channel currently
selected appears in the front panel display and the
XM indicator lights up.
y
• Selecting the “XM” band automatically recalls the channel
previously selected.
• You can change the kind of XM information by pressing
DISPLAY repeatedly. (For details, see “Switching XM
information in the front panel display” on page 48).
XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output from the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks.
■ Switching XM information in the front
panel display
You can display XM information (such as channel
number/name, category, or artist name/song title) for the
channel currently selected in the front panel display.
Press DISPLAY on the unit (or remote control
during the TUNER mode) repeatedly to toggle
between the following channel information
display modes.
When the channel number/name is displayed:
When the channel category is displayed:
When the artist name/song title is displayed:
y
• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric
characters at once. If the information contains more than 14
characters, the information scrolls from right to left.
• If the information contains a character that cannot be
recognized by the unit, the character will be displayed with an
underbar “_”.
If a status message or an error message appears in the display, see
“Status and error messages” on page 54.
Basic XM Satellite Radio
operations
Note
AUTO/MAN'L MONOMAN'L/AUTO FM
LEVEL
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHTSPEAKERS
BA
INPUT
XM
CATEGORY
DISPLAY
2
1
INPUT
or
Front panel
Remote control
T
UN
E
R
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DVR/VCR2
XM
TUNED
A
SP
[001] Preview
FM/AM
XM
TITLE
L
E
V
E
L
BA
ND
or
Front panel
Remote control
Lights
Note
DISPLAY
O
N
S
C
R
EE
N
D
I
SP
L
A
Y
Channel name/number
Channel category
Artist name/Song title
Front panel
Remote control
or
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DVR/VCR2
XM
TUNED
A
SP
[040] Deep Tra
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DVR/VCR2
XM
TUNED
A
SP
<CAT>Rock
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DVR/VCR2
XM
TUNED
A
SP
Coldplay / Clo
49
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Displaying XM information in the on-
screen display
You can display XM information on a video monitor by
pressing DISPLAY. It is much easier to see the available
information than reading it on the front panel display.
y
• In the SET MENU (see page 73), you can set the time for
displaying XM information in the on-screen display.
• When “XM DISPLAY” in the SET MENU is set to “OFF”, you
cannot display XM information in the on-screen display.
• If the information contains a character that cannot be
recognized by the unit (on-screen display program), the
character will be displayed with an underbar “_”.
You can search for the channel you want to listen to using
one of three search modes. You can also enter the number
directly to select the desired channel (For details, see
“Direct Number Access mode” on page 51).
■ All Channel Search mode
1 Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio
mode” on page 48.
2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on
the remote control) repeatedly to select “ALL
CH SEARCH”.
XM INFORMATION
ALL CH SEARCH
XM:040
CHAN:Deep Tracks
CAT:Rock
NAME:Coldplay
TITLE:Clocks
.(Coldplay/Clo)
[]/[]:CHANNEL
[<]/[>]:CATEGORY
p
p
XM Satellite Radio search modes
AUTO/MAN'L MONOMAN'L/AUTO FM
LEVEL
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHTSPEAKERS
BA
INPUT
XM
CATEGORY
DISPLAY
32
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DVR/VCR2
XM
TUNED
A
SP
ALL CH SEARCH
SEARCH MODE
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
or
Front panel Remote control
50
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
3 To change the channel category, press
CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote
control) repeatedly.
To search a channel within all channels,
press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control)
repeatedly.
y
You can search a channel with the quick search by pressing and
holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d
on the remote control).
■ Category Search mode
1 Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio
mode” on page 48.
2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on
the remote control) repeatedly to select “CAT
SEARCH”.
3 To change the channel category, press
CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote
control) repeatedly.
To search a channel within the selected
channel category, press PRESET/TUNING/CH
l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote
control) repeatedly.
y
You can search a channel with the quick search by pressing and
holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d
on the remote control).
CATEGORY
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
or
Front panel
Remote control
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
or
Front panel
Remote control
AUTO/MAN'L MONOMAN'L/AUTO FM
LEVEL
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHTSPEAKERS
BA
INPUT
XM
CATEGORY
DISPLAY
32
SEARCH MODE
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DVR/VCR2
XM
TUNED
A
SP
CAT SEARCH
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
or
Front panel Remote control
CATEGORY
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
or
Front panel
Remote control
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
or
Front panel
Remote control
51
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Preset Search mode
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search
mode, you should preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For
details, see “Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels”
on page 52. All preset channels (A1 to E8) recalls “001
Preview” by the factory setting.
1 Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio
mode” on page 48.
2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on
the remote control) repeatedly to select
“PRESET SEARCH”.
3 To change the preset group (A to E), press
CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote
control) repeatedly.
To change the preset number (1 to 8), press
PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH
u / d on the remote control) repeatedly.
y
You can also select the preset number directly by pressing the
numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control.
■ Direct Number Access mode
1 Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio
mode” on page 48.
2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on
the remote control) repeatedly to select “ALL
CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”.
AUTO/MAN'L MONOMAN'L/AUTO FM
LEVEL
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHTSPEAKERS
BA
INPUT
XM
CATEGORY
DISPLAY
32
CDTUNER
M
D
/
C
D
-
R
DVD
D
T
V
/
CB
L
V-AUX
VCR
D
V
R
/
V
C
R
2
X
M
T
UN
E
D
A
SP
PRESET SEARCH
SEARCH MODE
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
or
Front panel Remote control
CATEGORY
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
or
Front panel
Remote control
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
or
Front panel
Remote control
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE
A-E/CAT.
BAND
TV INPUT
TV VOL
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
+10
ENT.
NIGHT
EFFECTMEMORY
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
AVTV
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO
4321
87
09
65
PURE DIRECT
EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT
SPEAKERSAB
3
4
2
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DVR/VCR2
XM
TUNED
A
SP
ALL CH SEARCH
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DVR/VCR2
XM
TUNED
A
SP
CAT SEARCH
SEARCH MODE
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
or
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
or
Front panel Remote control
52
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the
desired channel number.
For example, to enter the number 123, press the
numeric buttons as shown below.
The display changes as follows.
4 If you enter fewer than three numbers you
may press ENT. to tune to the channel
immediately or wait a few seconds to confirm
the entered channel number.
y
• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after entering one-
digit or two-digit number, the unit automatically confirms the
entered channel number.
• Pressing a button other than numeric buttons or ENT. cancels
the direct number access procedure.
You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite
Radio channels (eight preset numbers in five preset
groups, A1 to E8). You can then recall any preset channel
easily by selecting the preset group and number as
described in “Preset Search mode” on page 51.
1 Search the XM Satellite Radio channel you
want to set as a preset channel.
To search the desired channel, carry out “All Channel
Search mode” or “Category Search mode” on page
46, or “Direct Number Access mode” on page 51.
2 Press MEMORY on the unit (or remote
control during the TUNER mode).
The MEMORY indicator flashes for about five
seconds.
1
STEREO
2
MUSIC
3
ENTERTAIN
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
DVR/VCR2
XM
A
SP
<XM> -12
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DVR/VCR2
XM
TUNED
A
SP
<XM>123
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
DVR/VCR2
XM
A
SP
<XM> --1
ENT.
Setting XM Satellite Radio preset
channels
AUTO/MAN'L MONOMAN'L/AUTO FM
LEVEL
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHTSPEAKERS
BA
INPUT
XM
CATEGORY
DISPLAY
2,5
4
3
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DVR/VCR2
XM
TUNED
A
SP
[040] Deep Tra
When the channel number “040” is selected
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MEMORY
MEMORY
RETURN
Flashes
or
Front panel
Remote control
53
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
3
While the MEMORY indicator is flashing, press
CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT.
j
/
i
on the remote
control) to select a preset group (A to E).
The group letter appears.
4 While the MEMORY indicator is flashing,
press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) to
select a preset number (1 to 8).
5 While the MEMORY indicator is flashing,
press MEMORY on the unit (or the remote
control) to preset the selected XM Satellite
Radio channel.
A colon appears next to the preset number for
confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns off.
Presetting a new channel clears the former preset channel stored
in the same preset group and number.
Note
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DVR/VCR2
XM
TUNED MEMORY
A
SP
C [040] Deep
Preset group
CATEGORY
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
or
Front panel
Remote control
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DVR/VCR2
XM
TUNED MEMORY
A
SP
C5 [040] Deep
Preset number
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
or
Front panel
Remote control
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
DVR/VCR2
XM
TUNED
A
SP
C5:[040] Deep
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
Colon appears
MEMORY
RETURN
or
Front panel
Remote control
54
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
■ Status and error messages
If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel
display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.
Message Cause Remedy
CHECK ANTENNA
The XM connect and Play digital antenna
accessory is not connected, or does not work
properly.
• Check the XM connect and Play digital antenna
accessory connections.
UPDATING
The XM user encryption code is being updated. • Wait until the encryption code is updated.
NO SIGNAL
The signal is too weak. • Check the XM connect and Play digital antenna
accessory connections and orient it for the best
reception.
LOADING
It takes longer than four seconds for audio or
text data to be decoded.
• Wait until the decoding process has finished.
OFF AIR
The XM Satellite Radio channel you selected is
not currently broadcasting any signal.
• Check the channel number again or select another
XM Satellite Radio channel.
<XM> - - -
The channel station ID (SID) is no longer
available.
- - - / - - -
No artist name/feature or song/program title is
available.
<CAT> - - -
No channels are available for the selected
category.
• Select another channel category by pressing
CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote
control) repeatedly.
RECORDING
55
BASIC
OPERATION
Recording adjustments and other operations are
performed from the recording components. Refer to the
operating instructions for those components.
1 Turn on the power of this unit and all
connected components.
2 Select the source component you want to
record from.
3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)
on the source component.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record
between other components connected to this unit.
• The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, “SPEAKER
LEVEL” (page 66) and programs does not affect recorded
material.
• A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit
cannot be recorded.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently
through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or
dubbing video signals, if your video source component is
connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite
video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a
composite video) signal to your VCR.
• Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not
output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording.
Likewise, analog signals input to the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are
not output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your
source component is connected to provide only digital (or
analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals.
• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT
channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not
output on VCR 1 OUT.)
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from
records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may
infringe copyright laws.
■ Special considerations when recording
DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to
digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise
being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to
record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,
the following considerations and adjustments need to be
made.
For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player
is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operating
instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will
be output from the player.
RECORDING
DISPLAY
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
LEVEL
CATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
XIM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
12
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X
DVD
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
1
2
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
or
Front panel Remote control
Notes
If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
56
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field
processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous
concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.
y
The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to
AUTO (see page 37) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.
• This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in
the actual hall, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.
• Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.
You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”
can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel
(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.1
Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to
select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on page 32 to 36.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
Notes
For movie/video sources
Remote
control
button
Program Features Sources
1
STEREO:
2ch Stereo
Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel (left and right) or plays back 2-channel
sources as is.
MULTI
2-CH
2
MUSIC:
POP/ROCK
This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling you are at
an actual jazz or rock concert.
3
ENTERTAINMENT:
TV Sports
Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the
sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching
various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs.
ENTERTAINMENT:
Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The
program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence
sound field.
ENTERTAINMENT:
Game
This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.
4
MOVIE THEATER:
Spectacle
CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm
movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and
the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby
Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).
MOVIE THEATER:
Sci-Fi
CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the
latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic
space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that
includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most
advanced techniques.
MOVIE THEATER:
Adventure
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design
of the newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be
similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are
restrained as much as possible.
MOVIE THEATER:
General
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multi-
channel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field.
57
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
5
SUR. STANDARD
Standard processing for the selected decoder.
MULTI
2-CH
SUR. ENHANCED
Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
Remote
control
button
Program Features Sources
58
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.
Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to
select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on page 32 to 36.
For music sources
Remote
control
button
Program Features Sources
1
STEREO:
2ch Stereo
2-channel (left and right) playback.
2-CH
STEREO:
7ch Stereo
Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a
larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.
2
MUSIC:
Hall in Vienna
HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700
seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce
a very full, rich sound.
MULTI
2-CH
MUSIC:
The Bttm Line
HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a
famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a
sound field offering a real and vibrant sound.
MUSIC:
The Roxy Thtr
HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for
this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at
the center-left of the hall.
3
ENTERTAINMENT:
Disco
HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively
disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also
characterized by high-energy, “immediate” sound.
5
SUR. STANDARD
Standard processing for the selected decoder.
MULTI
2-CH
SUR. ENHANCED
Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
59
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can display this unit’s operating information on a
video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound
field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much
easier to see the available options and parameters than it is
by reading this information on the front panel display.
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to change the
OSD mode.
The OSD mode changes in the
following order: full display, short
display, and display off.
Full display
Always shows the sound field program parameter settings
as well as the contents of the front panel display.
Short display
Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the
bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit.
Display off
Only operations performed using ON SCREEN are
displayed. The OSD is displayed when using SET MENU,
even if the OSD mode is set to “Display off”.
• The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will
not be recorded.
• You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when a
video source is not being reproduced (or the source component
is turned off) by using “DISPLAY SET” (see page 71).
• When using component video signals, the “Short display” is not
output to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
To display the OSD with component video signal input, set the
OSD mode to “Full Display” while GRAY BACK in DISPLAY
SET (see page 71) is set to AUTO.
Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to AC OUTLET(S).
■ Setting the sleep timer
1 Select a source and start playback on the
source component.
2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set
the amount of time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front
panel display changes as shown
below. The SLEEP indicator flashes
while switching the amount of time
for the sleep timer.
The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel
display, and the display returns to the selected sound
field program.
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
Selecting the OSD mode
Notes
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
P04
MOVIE THEATER
.General
DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB
P.INIT.DLY;;15ms
P.ROOMSIZE;;1.0
S.INIT.DLY;;20ms
S.ROOMSIZE;;1.0
P04MOVIETHEATER
General
Full display Short display
Using the sleep timer
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
2
SLEEP
SLEEP 90min
SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF
SLEEP 120min
CD PHONOTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
TUNED
VOLUME
SLEEP
A
SP
dB
HiFi DSP
LR
CD PHONOTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
TUNED
VOLUME
SLEEP
A
SP
dB
LR
TV Sports
SLEEP indicator
60
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
■ Canceling the sleep timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in
the front panel display.
After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the
SLEEP indicator goes off.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front
panel) to set this unit to the standby mode.
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
Please note that this operation will override the level
adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 24),
“SPEAKER LEVEL” (page 66).
1 Press AMP.
2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the
speaker you want to adjust.
FRONT L Front left speaker level
CENTER Center speaker level
FRONT R Front right speaker level
SUR.R Surround right speaker level
SUR.L Surround left speaker level
SUR.B.R Surround back right speaker level
SUR.B.L Surround back left speaker level
SWFR Subwoofer level
PRES.L Presence left speaker level
PRES.R Presence right speaker level
y
Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by
pressing u / d.
3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.
The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB.
4 Press ENTER when you have completed your
adjustment.
y
This operation can also be performed using the controls on the
front panel. Press NEXT repeatedly to select the speaker you
want to adjust, then press LEVEL –/+ to adjust the output level.
SLEEP
SLEEP OFF
Manually adjusting speaker levels
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE
A-E/CAT.
BAND
TV INPUT
TV VOL
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
AVTV
1
3
2
4
SET MENU
61
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
■ AUTO SETUP
Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 24).
■ MANUAL SETUP
Use to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
1 SOUND MENU
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for
video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.
y
Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 24). You can use SOUND
MENU to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first
.
2 INPUT MENU
Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode or rename your inputs.
SET MENU
Item Features Page
A)SPEAKER SET
Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over
frequency.
64
B)SPEAKER LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
66
C)SP DISTANCE
Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.
67
D)EQUALIZER
Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.
67
E)LFE LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
68
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
68
G)AUDIO SET
Customizes the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings.
68
Item Features Page
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.
69
B)INPUT MODE
Selects the initial input mode of the source.
70
C)INPUT RENAME
Changes the name of the inputs.
70
D)VOLUME TRIM
Adjusts the output volume of each jack.
70
62
SET MENU
3 OPTION MENU
Use to adjust the optional system parameters.
■ SIGNAL INFO
Use to check audio Signal information (see page 37).
Item Features Page
A)DISPLAY SET
Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals.
71
B)MEMORY GUARD
Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings.
71
C)PARAM. INI
Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.
72
D)MULTI ZONE SET
Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals or selects how
the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified.
72
E)XM RADIO SET
Displays the current reception level for the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory.
72
63
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
y
• You can change SET MENU parameters while the unit is
reproducing sound.
• If you press a sound field program button during SET MENU
operation, the SET MENU is canceled.
You cannot change some SET MENU parameters while the unit
is in either cinema or music night listening mode.
1 Press AMP.
2 Press SET MENU.
3 Press u / d to select MANUAL SETUP.
4 Press ENTER to enter MANUAL SETUP.
1 SOUND MENU appears on the front panel display.
5 Press u / d to select the desired menu.
6 Press ENTER to enter the selected menu.
7 Press u / d and ENTER to select the
submenu, then press u / d to select the item
and j / i to change the parameter.
• Repeat this operation to select and adjust each
setting.
• To return to the previous menu level, press
RETURN.
8 To exit, press SET MENU when finished.
Using SET MENU
Note
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE
A-E/CAT.
BAND
TV INPUT
TV VOL
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
PURE DIRECT
EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT
NIGHT
SPEAKERSAB
EFFECTMEMORY
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
AVTV
1
2,8
3-7
AMP
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
SET MENU
;AUTOSETUP
.;MANUALSETUP
.;SIGNAL INFO.
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, if the power cord is disconnected from the
AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one
week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the
items again.
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
;MANUAL SETUP
.1SOUNDMENU
2INPUTMENU
3OPTIONMENU
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
.A)SPEAKERSET
B)SPEAKERLEVEL
C)SPDISTANCE
D)EQUALIZER
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
1 SOUND
MENU 1/2
-+
.FL
FR
C
B)SPEAKER
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
64
SET MENU
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate for
video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or
projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are set
automatically when you run auto setup (see page 24)
.
■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.
y
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,
you can change these settings according to your preference.
Front speakers FRONT SP
Choices: LARGE, SMALL
• Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The
unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front
channel to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS
OUT”.
• Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The
unit directs the entire range of the front left and right
channel signals to the front left and right speakers.
Center speaker CENTER SP
Choices: LRG, SML, NONE
• Select LRG if you have a large center speaker. The unit
directs the entire range of the center channel signal to
the center speaker.
• Select SML if you have a small center speaker. The unit
directs the low-frequency signals of the center channel to
the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”.
• Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The
unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front
left and right speakers.
Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP
Choices: LRG, SML, NONE
• Select LRG if you have large surround left and right
speakers. The entire range of the surround channel
signal is directed to the surround left and right
speakers.
• Select SML if you have small surround left and right
speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround
channel are directed to the speakers selected with
“LFE/BASS OUT”.
• Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers.
This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP
mode (see page 36) and automatically set the surround
back speaker setting (SUR. B L/R SP) to NONE.
1 SOUND MENU
.A)SPEAKERSET
B)SPEAKERLEVEL
C)SPDISTANCE
D)EQUALIZER
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
1 SOUND
MENU 1/2
SMALL)LARGE
FRONT SP
NONE)SMLLRG
CENTER SP
NONE)SMLLRG
SUR. L/R SP
65
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Surround back speakers SUR. B L/R SP
Choices: LRGx1, LRGx2, SMLx2, SMLx1, NONE
• Select LRGx1 if you have a large surround back
speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the
surround back channel signal to the left surround back
speaker.
• Select LRGx2 if you have 2 large surround back
speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the
surround back channel signal to the surround back
speakers.
• Select SMLx2 if you have 2 small surround back
speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround
back channels are directed to the speakers selected with
“LFE/BASS OUT”.
• Select SMLx1 if you have a small surround back
speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround
back channel are directed to the speakers selected with
“LFE/BASS OUT”, and the rest of the frequency
signals are directed to the left surround back speaker.
• Select NONE if you do not have a surround back
speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back
channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.
If you select SMLx1 or LRGx1, connect the speaker to the left
SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.
Presence speakers PRESENCE SP
Choices: YES, NONE
• Select YES if you have presence speakers.
• Select NONE if you do not have presence speakers.
y
When YES is selected, the unit automatically adjusts the dialog
lift parameter. To adjust it manually, see page 92.
Bass out LFE/BASS OUT
Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the
subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers
according to the characteristics of your system. This
setting also determines the routing of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS
sources.
Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH
• Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and
low-frequency signals from other channels are directed
to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings.
• Select FRNT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and
low frequency signals from other channels are directed
to the front speakers according to the speaker settings
(even if you have previously set front speakers to
SML).
• Select BOTH if you connect a subwoofer and you want
to output low-frequency signals from front channels to
both the front speakers and subwoofer. LFE and low-
frequency signals from other channels are also directed
to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. Use
this function to reinforce low-frequency signals using
the subwoofer when playing back sources such as CDs.
Cross over CROSS OVER
Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency
for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the
selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer.
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
Note
SMLx1)SMLx2
SUR. B L/R SP
)NONEYES
PRESENCE SP
SWFRFRNT)BOTH
LFE/BASS OUT
FREQ;;;80Hz
CROSS OVER
66
SET MENU
Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE
If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to
switch the phase of your subwoofer.
Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE
• Select NORMAL if you do not want to reverse the
phase of your subwoofer.
• Select REVERSE to reverse the phase of your
subwoofer.
Presence/Surround back channel priority
PRIORITY
You can select to prioritize either the surround back or
presence speakers when playing sources that contain
surround back channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound
field programs.
Choices: PRch, SBch
• Select PRch to use presence speakers even when
surround back channel signals are input. The signals
for the surround back channel will be output from
surround speakers.
• Select SBch to use surround back speakers when a
surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA
DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output
from front speakers.
■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL
Use these settings to manually balance the speaker level of
each speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 64).
Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Initial Setting: 0 dB
• FL adjusts the balance of the front left speaker.
• FR adjusts the balance of the front right speaker.
• C adjusts the balance of the center speaker.
• SL adjusts the balance of the surround left speaker.
• SR adjusts the balance of the surround right speaker.
• SBL
*
adjusts the balance of the surround back left
speaker.
• SBR
*
adjusts the balance of the surround back right
speaker.
• SWFR adjusts the balance of the subwoofer.
• PL adjusts the balance of the presence left speaker.
• PR adjusts the balance of the presence right speaker.
*
Instead of SBL and SBR, SB will be displayed if you selected
only one surround back speaker in SUR. B L/R SP (page 65).
)NORMALREVERSE
02ASUBWOOFER PHASE
PRch )SBch
p
p
PRIORITY
-+
.FL
FR
C
B)SPEAKER
LEVEL
67
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
Use this feature to manually input the distance of each
speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time.
Unit UNIT
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)
Initial setting:
U.S.A. and Canada models: feet (ft)
Other models: meters (m)
• Select meters to input speaker distances in meters.
• Select feet to input speaker distances in feet.
Speaker distances
Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft)
• FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.
Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker.
Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• SUR. L adjusts the distance of the surround left
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• SUR. R adjusts the distance of the surround right
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• SB L
*
adjusts the distance of the surround back left
speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)
• SB R
*
adjusts the distance of the surround back right
speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)
• SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial
setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• PRES L adjusts the distance of the presence left
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• PRES R adjusts the distance of the presence right
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
*
Instead of SB L and SB R, SUR. B will be displayed if you
selected only one surround back speaker in SUR. B L/R SP
(page 65).
■ Center graphic equalizer D)EQUALIZER
Use this feature to select the parametric (AUTO PEQ) or
graphic equalizer (CNTR GEQ).
Equalizer EQ TYPE SELECT
Select to change the type of equalizer used by this unit.
Choices: AUTO PEQ, CNTR GEQ, EQ OFF
• Select AUTO PEQ to use the equalizer adjusted in auto
setup.
• Select CNTR GEQ to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic
equalizer so that the tonal quality of the center speaker
matches that of the front left and right speakers.
• Select EQ OFF to cancel equalizing.
Center graphic equalizer CENTER GEQ
When CNTR GEQ is selected, use this feature to output a
test tone and adjust the tonal quality so that it matches that
of the front left speaker.
You can adjust 5 frequency bands:
100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz, 10kHz
Choices: –6 to +6 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
• Select ON to output test tones from the front left and
center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the
center speaker.
• Select OFF to stop the test tone and output the
currently selected source component.
• Press u / d to select a frequency band.
• Press j / i to adjust the selected frequency band.
. UNIT;;;;;;meters
FRONTL;;;;3.00m
FRONTR;;;;3.00m
CENTER;;;;;3.00m
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
p
p
C)SP
DISTANCE
.TEST)OFFON
-+
100Hz0dB
300Hz0dB
1kHz0dB
3kHz0dB
10kHz0dB
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
D)EQUALIZER
p
p
68
SET MENU
■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL
Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency
effect) channel according to the capacity of your
subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-
frequency special effects which are only added to certain
scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Choices: –20 to 0 dB
Speaker SPEAKER
Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.
Headphone HEADPHONE
Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.
Depending on the settings of “LFE LEVEL”, some signals may
not be output from the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack.
■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE
Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to
be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is
effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and
DTS signals.
Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard), MAX
(maximum)
Speaker SP
Select to adjust the speaker compression.
Headphone HP
Select to adjust the headphone compression.
• Select MIN if you regularly listen at low volume
levels.
• Select STD for general use.
• Select MAX to preserve the greatest amount of
dynamic range.
■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET
Use to customize this units overall audio settings.
Muting type MUTING TYPE
Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the
output volume.
Choices: FULL, –20dB
• Select FULL to completely halt all output of sound.
• Select –20dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Audio delay AUDIO DELAY
Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the
video image. This may be necessary when using certain
LCD monitors or projectors.
Choices: 0 to 160 ms
Tone bypass TONE BYPASS
Use to select whether audio output bypasses tone control
circuitry when TREBLE and BASS are set to 0 dB (see
page 31).
Choices: AUTO, OFF
• Select AUTO if you want signals to bypass tone
control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible.
• Select OFF if you do not want signals to bypass tone
control circuitry.
Note
.SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
p
p
E)LFE
LEVEL
.SP:MINSTD)MAX
HP:MINSTD)MAX
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
p
p
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
.MUTING TYPE;;FULL
AUDIODELAY;;0ms
TONE BYPASS;;AUTO
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
p
p
G)AUDIO SET
69
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode
or rename your inputs.
■ Input/output assignment
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
You can assign jacks according to the component to be
used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your
needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the
respective jacks and effectively connect more
components.
Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the
corresponding component by using INPUT on the front
panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control.
For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A (CMPNT-V
INPUT [A]
) and B (CMPNT-V INPUT [B])
Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR1,
DVR/VCR2
[B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR1,
DVR/VCR2
For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 (OPTICAL OUT (1))
Choices: PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2
For OPTICAL INPUT jack 2 (OPTICAL IN (2)
),
3
(OPTICAL IN (3)) and 4 (OPTICAL IN (4))
Choices: (2) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
VCR1, DVR/VCR2
(3) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
VCR1, DVR/VCR2
(4) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
VCR1, DVR/VCR2
For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 5 (COAXIAL IN (5)
)
and 6
(COAXIAL IN (6))
Choices: (5) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2
(6) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the
COAXIAL jack.
2 INPUT MENU
.A)I/OASSIGNMENT
B)INPUTMODE
C)INPUTRENAME
D)VOLUME TRIM
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
2
INPUT
MENU
p
p
.[A];;;;;DVD
(DVD)
[B];;;;;DTV/CBL
(DTV/CBL)
CMPNT-V
INPUT
.(1);;;;;MD/CD-R
(MD/CD-R )
OPTICAL
OUT
Notes
.(2);;;;;MD/CD-R
(MD/CD-R)
(3);;;;; DVD
(DVD )
(4);;;;;DTV/CBL
(DTV/CBL )
OPTICAL
IN
.(5);;;;; CD
(CD)
(6);;;;; DVD
(DVD )
COAXIAL
IN
70
SET MENU
■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE
Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources
connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on
this unit (see page 37 for details about the input mode).
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select AUTO to allow this unit to automatically detect
the type of input signal and select the appropriate input
mode.
• Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the
last input mode used for that source.
Even if LAST is selected, the last setting for the EX/ES button
will not be recalled.
■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the inputs on the
OSD and front panel display.
1 Press an input selector button to select the
input you want to change the name of.
2 Press AMP.
3 Press j / i to place the _ (under-bar) under
the space or the character you want to edit.
4 Press u / d to select the character you want,
then use j / i to move to the next space.
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
• Press d to change the character in the following
order, or press u to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space,
symbols (#, *, -, +, etc.)
5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 to rename each
input.
6 To exit, press SET MENU when finished.
■ Volume Trim D) VOLUME TRIM
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input to
each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of
each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume
when switching between input sources.
Choices: PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/
CBL, V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2
Note
)AUTOLAST
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
B)INPUT
MODE
DVD->DVD
[<]/[>]:Position
[]/[]:Chara.
C)INPUT
RENAME
p
p
71
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use to adjust the optional system parameters.
■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET
Dimmer DIMMER
Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.
Choices: –4 to 0
Video conversion VIDEO CONV.
Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite
(VIDEO) signals to both S-video and component signals.
This allows you to output converted video signals from
the S VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks when no
S-video or component signals are input. This feature also
converts S-video signals to component signals when no
component signals are input.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select OFF not to convert any signals. (except S-video
signals to composite signals)
• Select ON to convert composite signals to S-video and
component signals, and to convert S-video signals to
component signals.
• Regardless of the setting, S-video signals are always
converted to composite signals.
• Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT
jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video
connections (i.e., S-video) between each component.
• When converting composite video or S-video signals from a
VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer
depending on your VCR.
OSD shift OSD SHIFT
Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.
Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward)
• Press + to lower the position of the OSD.
• Press – to raise the position of the OSD.
Gray back GRAY BACK
Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays
a gray background when there’s no video signal input.
Nothing is displayed if OFF is selected.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
• When only the component video signals are input, the OSD is
not displayed if GRAY BACK is set to OFF. To display the
OSD with component video signal input, set GRAY BACK to
AUTO while the OSD mode (see page 59) is set to “Full
Display”.
• When video signals are not being input, set GRAY BACK to
AUTO to display the OSD.
Component OSD CMPNT OSD
Use this feature to turn on/off OSD output to the
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks when
using the SET MENU.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select ON to output the OSD signals from
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
• Select OFF if you do not want to output the OSD
signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
jacks.
SET MENU functions even when OFF is selected.
■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choices: OFF, ON
Select ON to protect:
• DSP program parameters
• All SET MENU items
• All speaker levels
• The on-screen display (OSD) mode
When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, you cannot select any
other SET MENU items.
3 OPTION MENU
Notes
.A)DISPLAYSET
B)MEMORYGUARD
C)PARAM.INI
D)MULTI ZONESET
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
3
OPTION
MENU
p
p
.DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0
VIDEOCONV.;;;ON
OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0
GRAYBACK;;;AUTO
CMPNTOSD;;;;;ON
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:sELECT
A)DISPLAY
SET
p
p
Notes
Note
Note
)OFFON
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
B)MEMORY
GUARD
72
SET MENU
■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI
Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound
field program within a sound field program group. When
you initialize a sound field program group, all of the
parameter values within that group revert to their initial
settings.
Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound
field
program that you want to initialize.
Choices:
An asterisk (*) appears next to program numbers that have
been changed from their initial settings.
Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT,
MOVIE, STANDAND
• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter
settings once you initialize a
sound field program group.
• You cannot separately initialize individual
sound field
programs.
• You cannot initialize any program groups when “MEMORY
GUARD” is set to ON.
■ Zone set D) MULTI ZONE SET
Use to specify the location of speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS B terminals.
Speaker B setting SP B
Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
Choices: FRONT, ZONE B
• Select FRONT to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B
when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B
terminals are set in the main room.
• Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If
SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is
turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in
the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound
from SPEAKERS B only.
• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit
when “SP B” is set to ZONE B, the sound is output from both
headphones and SPEAKERS B.
• If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to ZONE B,
the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.
Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP
(U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models only)
Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified.
Choices: INT, EXT
• Select EXT if you do not use Zone 2 speakers or if you
connect your Zone 2 speakers through an external
amplifiers connected to this unit’s ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks.
• Select INT to use this unit’s internal amplifier if you
connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s
PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals.
■ XM Radio setting E)XM RADIO SET
XM information display time
XM DISPLAY
Use to set the time for displaying XM information in the
on-screen display. If “10s” or “30s” is selected, xm
information is displayed for 10 or 30 seconds after
pressing DISPLAY.
Choices: OFF, 10s, 30s, ON
y
When “XM DISPLAY” in the SET MENU is set to “ON”,
pressing DISPLAY shows xm information until you select
another input source (see page 30).
XM Radio antenna XM ANT.
Use to check the current reception level for the XM
connect and Play digital antenna accessory connected to
this unit. For the best reception, orient the XM connect
and Play digital antenna accessory so that a value of XX%
or more is displayed here.
Range: NONE, 0 to 100%
“NONE” is displayed if the XM connect and Play digital antenna
accessory is not connected to this unit. If this happens, check the
antenna connections (see page 45).
Notes
STEREO
*MUSIC
ENTERTAINMENT
MOVIE THEATER
*STANDARD
Press DSP Key
C)PARAM.
INI
.SPB;;;;;;;;FRONT
ZONE2 AMP;;;;;EXT
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
D)MULTI ZONE
SET
Notes
Note
.SPB;;;;;;;;FRONT
ZONE2 AMP;;;;;EXT
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
D)MULTI ZONE
SET
E)XM RADIO SET
XM DISPLAY;;;10S
XM ANTENNA;;;75%
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
ADVANCED SETUP MENU
73
ADVANCED
OPERATION
The ADVANCED SETUP menu is displayed in the front
panel display.
y
• During the advanced setup procedure, audio output is muted.
• During the advanced setup procedure, only the STANDBY/ON,
STRAIGHT (EFFECT) buttons, and PROGRAM selector on
the front panel are available for operation.
Be sure to set the speaker impedance before using this unit
to play back audio or video signals.
1 Turn off the power to this unit, and while
holding down STRAIGHT (EFFECT), press
STANDBY/ON.
This unit turns on, and the ADVANCED SETUP
menu appears in the front panel display.
2 Rotate PROGRAM to move through the menu
and select the item you want to set up.
See the end of this section for a complete list of
available parameters.
3 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) repeatedly to
toggle between the available parameters.
4 Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your
selection.
This completes the advanced setup procedure.
The settings you made are reflected the next time this
unit’s power is turned on.
ADVANCED SETUP MENU
CAUTION
DISPLAY
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
LEVEL
CATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
XIM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
1,4 2
1,3
(U.S.A. model)
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
STANDBY
/ON
While holding
down, press
PROGRAM
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
STANDBY
/ON
74
ADVANCED SETUP MENU
■ ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each
parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
Speaker impedance SP IMP.
Use to switch the speaker impedance for this unit.
Choices: 8 Ω MIN, 4 Ω MIN
• Select 8 Ω MIN to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω.
• Select 4 Ω MIN to set the speaker impedance to 4 Ω.
• The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems
(A and B) simultaneously when SP IMP is set to the 8 Ω MIN
position.
Factory presets PRESET
Use to reset all parameters to the factory presets (see
page 98).
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
• Select CANCEL if you do not want this unit’s
parameters to be initialized when you reset the factory
presets.
• Select RESET if you want all of this unit’s parameters
to be initialized when you reset the factory presets.
This setting does not affect ADVANCED SETUP menu item
parameters.
Remote REMOTE
Use to switch the ID for the remote control of this unit.
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select ID1 to operate this unit using the default code.
• Select ID2 to operate this unit using an alternative
code.
You must also make settings for the remote control (see page 76).
< Asia and General models only >
Tuner TU
Use to switch the frequency step selection according to the
frequency spacing in your area.
Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50
• North, Central and South America:
AM10/FM100 (kHz)
• Other areas: AM9/FM50 (kHz)
SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level
4 Ω ΜΙΝ
Front
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 4 Ω or
higher.
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Center
The impedance of each
speaker must be 6 Ω or
higher.
Surround
Surround back
8 Ω ΜΙΝ
Front
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 16 Ω or
higher.
*
Center
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Surround
Surround back
Note
Note
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
75
ADVANCED
OPERATION
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and
other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up remote control with the appropriate remote control
codes. This remote control also has a learn feature which allows the remote to acquire functions from other remote
controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter.
■ Controlling this unit
The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit
after pressing AMP to activate the AMP mode.
Fixing the remote to AMP mode
You can fix the remote permanently to AMP mode (fixed AMP
mode) so that the shaded areas above always control this unit.
This is useful, if you primarily want to use the remote control in
AMP mode. To fix AMP mode, hold down AMP for at least 3
seconds so that “A:___” appears in the display window.
To temporarily switch to component control mode, press AMP.
To cancel fixed AMP mode, hold down AMP for at least 3
seconds.
■ Controlling other components
The shaded areas below can be used to control other
components. Each button has a different function
depending on the selected component. Select the
component you want to control by pressing an input
selector button or SELECT k/n. The name of the selected
component appears in the display window.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Control area
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE
A-E/CAT.
BAND
TV INPUT
TV VOL
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
PURE DIRECT
EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT
NIGHT
SPEAKERSAB
EFFECTMEMORY
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
The buttons in the
dotted lines control
this unit in any
mode (SYSTEM
POWER,
STANDBY,
SLEEP, INPUT
MODE, MULTI CH
IN, VOLUME +/–,
MUTE,
STRAIGHT and
input selector
buttons) function in
any mode.
Press AMP
to control
this unit.
Fixed AMP mode
Component control mode
A:DVD DVD
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE
A-E/CAT.
BAND
TV INPUT
TV VOL
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENTER
PURE DIRECT
EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT
NIGHT
SPEAKERSAB
EFFECTMEMORY
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
MENUTITLE
CH CH
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE
BAND
TV INPUT
TV VOL
ON SCREEN
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
PURE DIRECT
EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT
NIGHT
SPEAKERSAB
MEMORY
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
AVTV
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
The A/B and input selector
buttons switch the function
of the component control
area below.
*
Use the A/B buttons to
control other components
regardless of whether they
are connected to this unit.
Factory setting:
A...LD player
B...CD recorder
SELECT k/n switches
control to another
component without
changing the input source
on this unit.
Component control
area
You can control up to 11
different components by
setting appropriate remote
control codes (see
page 76).
76
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate manufacturer codes. Codes can be set up for
each input area.
The following table shows the factory preset component
(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code
for each area.
Remote Control Code Default Settings
You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even
if a YAMAHA remote control code is initially set as listed above.
In this case, try to set other YAMAHA remote control code(s).
1 Press an input selector button to select the
source component you want to set up.
2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds
using a ballpoint pen or similar object.
“SETUP” and the selected component name appear
alternately in the display window.
Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3
seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.
y
Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.
If you want to change a library (component
category), press j / i. You can set a different
type of component.
Library choices: L:DVD, L:DVR, L:LD, L:CD,
L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN, L:AMP*,
L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:DBS, L:SAT, L:VCR
• The amplifier Library (L:AMP) code is preset to “ID1” to
operate this unit. However, you can switch between the
following two codes if necessary.
The initial setting for “Amplifier library” is “ID1”.
When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be
able to operate the other components simultaneously with the
default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes
to operate this unit separately
Setting remote control codes
Input area
Component
category
(Library)
Manufacturer
ALD
Yamaha (U.K. and Europe models)
Yamaha-1 (Other models)
B CD-R Yamaha
PHONO TV –
V-AUX VCR –
TUNER TUNER
Yamaha-3 (U.K. and Europe models)
Yamaha-4 (Other models)
MD/CD-R MD Yamaha-1
CD CD Yamaha-1
DTV/CBL TV –
VCR 1 VCR –
DVR/VCR2 DVR Yamaha
DVD DVD Yamaha-1
Note
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
AMP library
code
(remote
control
setting)
Function
Remote
control ID
(this unit’s
setting: see
page 74)
ID1
(initial setting)
To operate this unit using the
default code.
ID1
(initial
setting)
ID1Z To operate this unit using the
default code.
To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3
features (see page 83).
(U.S.A., Canada, Europe and
Australia models only)
ID2
To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
ID2
ID2Z
To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3
features (see page 83).
(U.S.A., Canada, Europe and
Australia models only)
LEARN
77
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
3 Press u / d to select the name of your
component’s manufacturer.
You will find the names of most worldwide audio-
video manufacturers in alphabetical order in the
display window.
4 Press one of the buttons shaded below to
see if you can control your component. If you
can, the manufacturer code is correct.
y
• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one
codes, try each of them until you find the correct one.
• If you continuously want to set up a code for another
component, press TV MUTE/ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3
and 4.
5 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible
manufacturer codes for commercially available AV components
(including YAMAHA AV components). If operation is not
possible with any of the manufacturer codes, program the new
remote control function with the Learn feature (see below) or
use the remote control supplied with the component.
• If you have already programmed a remote control function for a
button, the function by learning programming takes priority
over the setup manufacturer code’s function.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more
than one button at the same time.
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
VOL
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE
BAND
TV INPUT
TV VOL
AVTV
Notes
LEARN
78
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you
can use this remote to control your other components.
Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the
selected component. Use the input selector buttons to
select the component you want to operate. The remote
control automatically switches to the appropriate control
mode for that component.
*1
This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button.
*2
These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV/CBL or PHONO. When the
remote control code for your TV is set up in both the DTV/CBL and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/CBL
area.
*3
These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1.
*4
The U.K. model is not equipped with the tuner reception function.
Controlling other components
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDI O
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE
A-E/CAT.
BAND
TV INPUT
TV VOL
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
PURE DIRECT
EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT
NIGHT
SPEAKERSAB
EFFECTMEMORY
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
AVTV
3
2
1
4
5
6
8
7
9
0
A
DVD player/
DVD recorder
VCR
Digital TV/
Cable TV
LD player CD player
MD/CD
recorder
Tuner
*4
1 AV POWER
Power *1 Power *1 VCR power *3 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1
2 TV POWER
TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2
3 REC/DISC
SKIP
Disc skip (player)
Rec (recorder)
Rec VCR rec *3 Disc skip Rec (MD)
h Play Play VCR play *3 Play Play Play
ll Search backward Search backward
VCR search
backward *3
Search backward Search backward Search backward
hh Search forward Search forward
VCR search
forward *3
Search forward Search forward Search forward
AUDIO Audio Sound
e Pause Pause VCR pause *3 Pause Pause Pause
b Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward
a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward
s Stop Stop VCR stop *3 Stop Stop Stop
4 TITLE/
TV INPUT
Title TV input *2 TV input TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 Band
5 TV MUTE/
ENTER
Select TV mute *2 TV mute TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2
6 TV VOL +
Up TV volume + *2 TV volume + TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 Preset up (1 – 8)
TV VOL – Down TV volume – *2 TV volume – TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 Preset down (1 – 8)
CH + Right VCR channel + TV channel + TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 Preset up (A – E)
CH – Left VCR channel – TV channel – TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2
Preset down
(A – E)
7 RETURN
Return
8 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8)
9 MENU
Menu
0 DISPLAY
Display Display Display Display Display
A ENT.
Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index
79
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
If you want to program functions not included in the basic
operations covered by the remote control code, or an
appropriate remote control code is not available, do the
following. You can program any of the buttons available
in the component control area (see page 75). The buttons
can be programmed independently for each component.
This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote
control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most
of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some
special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the
operating instructions for the remote control of your component.)
1 Press an input selector button to select a
source component.
2 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm
apart from the other remote control on a flat
surface so that their infrared transmitters are
aimed at each other.
3 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down
for more than three seconds, the remote enters the
manufacturer code setting mode.
y
Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.
4 Press the button at which you want to
program the new function.
“LEARN” is displayed.
5 Press and hold the button you want to
program on the other remote control until
“OK” appears in the display window.
Programming codes from other
remote controls
Note
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV- AUX
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)
Flashes alternately
LEARN
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV- AUX
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
VOL
DISC SKIP
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV- AUX
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
80
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
• “NG” appears in the display window if programming was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.
• This remote control can learn approximately 120 functions.
However depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may
appear in the display before you program 120 functions. In this
case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room
for further learning.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program additional
functions.
7 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning
mode.
• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:
– When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other
components are weak.
– When the distance between the two remote controls is too
great or too small.
– When the remote control infrared windows are not facing at
the appropriate angle.
– When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.
– When the function to be programmed is continuous or
uncommon.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more
than one button at the same time.
You can change the name that appears in the display
window on the remote control if you want to use a
different name to the one that is set as the factory preset.
This is useful when you have set the input selector to
control a different component.
1 Press an input selector button to select the
source component you want to rename.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
2 Press RE-NAME using a
ballpoint pen or similar
object.
3 Press u / d to select and enter a character.
Pressing d changes the character as follows:
A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, -(hyphen), and /(slash).
(Pressing u changes the characters in reverse order.)
4 Press j / i to move the cursor to the next
position.
y
If you want to continue setting up names for other
components, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1,
3 and 4.
5 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the
renaming mode.
Notes
Notes
LEARN
Changing source names in the
display window
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
RE-NAME
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
RE-NAME
81
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can clear all changes made in each function set, such
as learned functions, renamed source names and setup
manufacturer codes.
1 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
y
Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Other
wise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In
this case, press CLEAR again.
2 Press u / d to select the clear mode.
L:DVD
(L: name of a component)
Clears all learned functions in the respective
component control area. Press an input selector
button to select the component.
L:AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control
area.
L:ALL Clears all learned functions.
RNAME Clears all renamed source names.
FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote
to the factory settings.
3 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3
seconds.
“C:OK” appears in the display window.
“C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2.
4 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode.
Once you have cleared a learned function for a
button, the button reverts to the factory preset setting.
“ERROR” appears in the display window under the following
circumstances:
– When a button other than the cursor is pressed.
– When more than one button is pressed at the same time.
Clearing function sets
Note
CLEAR
CLEAR
Note
CLEAR
82
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Clearing a learned function
You can clear the function learned in a certain
programmed button in each area.
1 Press an input selector button to select the
source component containing the function
you want to clear.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
2 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“LEARN” and the selected component name appear
alternately in the display window.
y
Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds.
Otherwise the learning mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, press LEARN again.
3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen
or similar object, then press the button you
want to clear for about 3 seconds.
“C:OK” appears in the display window.
When you clear a learned function, the button reverts
to the factory preset setting (or manufacturer setting
if you have set manufacturer codes).
4 Repeat step 3 to clear other learned
functions.
5 Press LEARN again to exit.
Clearing individual functions
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
LEARN
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA, AUSTRALIA AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY)
83
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. You can control this unit from the second room using the
supplied remote control.
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second room.
• An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second
room to the main room (to a CD player, for example).
• An amplifier and speakers for the second room.
y
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room installation, we recommend that you consult with your
nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements.
• Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE CONTROL OUT jack of this unit. If you own these products,
you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to 6 YAMAHA components can be connected as shown.
•
■ System configuration and connections example
• When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the volume control on the amplifier in the
second room.
• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA, AUSTRALIA AND EUROPE MODELS
ONLY)
Only analog signals are sent to the second room. Any source you want to listen to in the second room must be
connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit.
Zone 2 connections
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
REMOTE
CONTROL OUT
This unit
Notes
REMOTE CONTROL OUT
DVD INPUT
ZONE 2 REMOTE IN
ZONE 2 OUTPUT
This unit
Infrared emitter
DVD player
(or other component)
Amplifier
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Second room
Main room
84
ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA, AUSTRALIA AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY)
Using this unit’s internal amplifier
To use this unit’s internal amplifier, set “ZONE2 AMP” to “INT” in SET MENU (see page 72).
The supplied remote control can be used to control Zone
2. You can even select the input source and control
components located in the main room directly from the
second room regardless of the listening condition in the
main room.
y
You can also turn on/off the MAIN and ZONE 2 mode by
pressing MAIN or ZONE 2 on the front panel.
■ To enable Zone 2 mode on the remote
control
You will be able to switch the remote control mode from
one room to another, and use STANDBY, SYSTEM
POWER, MUTE and VOL –/+ to control the selected
room.
1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 of the procedure in
“Setting remote control codes” on page 76.
2 Press j / i to select “L:AMP”.
3 Press u / d to select “ID1Z”.
• To select the Zone feature with ID2, select “ID2Z”.
• Since the Zone 2 code is common to “ID1Z” and “ID2Z”, the
Zone 2 code does not change even if the AMP library code
(remote control setting) is switched.
4 Press LEARN to complete the Zone setup.
The remote control will be able to operate this unit
and Zone 2.
■ To control Zone 2
1 Press SELECT k repeatedly to display
“ZONE2” in the display window.
2 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 power
on.
R
L
+
–
PRESENCE
/ZONE 2
Second room
This unit
Remote controlling Zone 2
Notes
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
LEARN
SELECT
85
ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA, AUSTRALIA AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
3 Press an input selector button to select the
input source you want to listen to in the
second room.
The display window shows “2: name of selected
input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2 mode.
4 You can control Zone 2 using the input
selector, STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE
and VOL –/+.
* If “ZONE2 AMP” in OPTION MENU is set to INT, you
can use VOL –/+ to adjust sound output from speakers
connected to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals
(see page 72). However, VOL –/+ cannot be used to
adjust sound output from the ZONE2 OUTPUT jacks.
5 Press SELECT k/n to exit from the Zone 2
mode.
• “ZONE2” will appear in the display window only when k is
pressed, and SYSTM only when n is pressed.
• If you press SELECT k when the unit is set to Zone 2 mode, the
unit switches to Zone 3 mode. However, this unit does not
support Zone 3 mode. To exit Zone 3 mode, press SELECT n.
• Since the Zone 2 code is common to “ID1Z” and “ID2Z”, the
Zone 2 code does not change even if the AMP library code
(remote control setting) is switched.
■ Turning this unit to either on or standby
SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY work differently
depending on the selected mode that appears on the
display window.
• When normal, Zone 2 mode is selected, you can turn
the main unit, Zone 2 to on/standby individually.
• When system mode is selected, or when ID1/ID2 is
selected as the amplifier library (L:AMP) code, you
can turn the main unit, Zone 2 to on/standby all
together simultaneously.
*
“MAIN” appears for a few seconds when SYSTEM POWER
or STANDBY is pressed.
■ Special considerations for DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. If you attempt to
send the DTS signal to the second room you will only hear
digital noise (that may damage your speakers). Thus, the
following considerations and adjustments need to be made
when playing DTS-encoded discs.
For DVDs encoded in DTS
Only 2 channel analog audio signals may be sent to the
second room.
Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed
2-channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or
Dolby Digital soundtrack.
For CDs encoded in DTS
To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2
feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
Notes
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
*
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV- AUX
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
REC
AUDI O
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE
A-E/CAT.
BAND
TV INPUT
TV VOL
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
EFFECTMEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
LCD display SYSTEM POWER/
STANDBY
Normal mode
*
Name of component Turns the main unit
on/standby
Zone 2 mode “ZONE2” or “2:name
of component”
Turns Zone 2 to on/
standby
System mode “SYSTM” Turns everything (the
main unit and Zone
2) on/standby
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
86
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections
enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
■ Elements of a sound field
In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming
straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are
two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to
make up the sound field:
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
– 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only – for example, from the ceiling or a wall.
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface – walls, ceiling, the back of the room – so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen
the clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberation taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a
concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at
all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly
what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field
processor.
You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset
parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial
settings, you can change some of the parameters to better
suit the input source or your listening room.
1 Press AMP.
2 Turn on the video monitor and
press ON SCREEN repeatedly
to select the full display
mode.
3 Select the sound field program you want to
adjust.
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
What is a sound field Changing parameter settings
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE
A-E/CAT.
BAND
TV INPUT
TV VOL
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
PURE DIRECT
EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT
NIGHT
SPEAKERSAB
EFFECTMEMORY
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
2
4
5
3
1
AMP
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENT.
PURE DIRECT
EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT
NIGHT
SPEAKERSAB
CHP/INDEX
P04
MOVIE THEATER
.General
DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB
P.INIT.DLY;;15ms
P.ROOMSIZE;;1.0
S.INIT.DLY;;20ms
S.ROOMSIZE;;1.0
Program No. Program name
Parameters Parameter values
Cursor
87
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
4 Press u / d to select
the parameters.
5 Press j / i to change
the parameter value.
When you set a parameter
to a value other than the
factory-set value, an
asterisk mark (*) appears
by the parameter name on
the on-screen display.
y
If you press and hold </> to change the parameter value, the
front panel display automatically stops at the factory preset
parameter momently.
6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 as necessary to
change other program parameters.
You cannot change parameter values when “MEMORY
GUARD” is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter
values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to OFF (see page 71).
■ Resetting parameters to the factory
presets
To reset all parameters
Use PARAM. INI (see page 72).
Note
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the parameter values will return to the
factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter
value again.
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
CH CH
PRESET/CH
TV VOL
TV MUTE
ENTER
TV VOL
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
88
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
■ DSP LEVEL (DSP level)
Function: Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.
Description: Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP
effect level relative to the level of the direct sound.
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB
■ INIT. DLY/P. INIT. DLY (Initial delay)
Function: Changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound
and the first reflection heard by the listener.
Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther
it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value.
Control range: 1
to 99 msec
■ ROOM SIZE/P. ROOM SIZE (Room size)
Function: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround
sound field becomes.
Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from
one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
Source Sound
Early
Reflections
Time
Time
Time
Delay
Delay
Delay
Sound Source
Reflection Face
Level
Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Time
Time
Time
Source Sound
Early
Reflections
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
Sound Source
89
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ LIVENESS (Liveness)
Function: Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections
decay.
Description: The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall
surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces
is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The
LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the
room.
Control range: 0 to 10
■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround initial delay)
Function: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound
field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels
are used.
Control Range: 1 to 49 msec
■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround room size)
Function: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.
Control Range: 0.1 to 2.0
■ S. LIVENESS (Surround liveness)
Function: Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.
Control Range: 0 to 10
■ SB INI. DLY (Surround back initial delay)
Function: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field.
Control Range: 1 to 49 msec
■ SB ROOM SIZE (Surround back room size)
Function: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field.
Control Range: 0.1 to 2.0
■ SB LIVENESS (Surround back liveness)
Function: Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field.
Control Range: 0 to 10
Source Sound
Level
Level
Level
Dead
Live
Time
Time Time
Small Reflected
Sound
Large
Reflected Sound
Small value = 0
Large value = 10
90
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
■ REV.TIME (Reverberation time)
Function: Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at
1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range.
Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time
for “live” sources and listening room environments.
Control Range: 1.0 to 5.0 sec
■ REV.DELAY (Reverberation delay)
Function: Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the
reverberation sound.
Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you
feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment.
Control Range: 0 to 250 msec
■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation level)
Function: Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.
Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.
Control Range: 0 to 100%
Reverberation Reverberation
60 dB 60 dB 60 dB
Source Sound
Reverberation time
Early Reflections
Sound Source
Short
Reverberation
Long
Reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s
Reverberation time
Reverberation time
(dB)
60 dB
Level
Source Sound
Reverberation
Reverberation time
Reverberation
delay
Time
Source Sound
Level
Reverberation level
Time
91
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ DIALG.LIFT (Dialog lift)
Function: Adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center
channel elements to the presence speakers.
Description: The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound.
Choices: 0/1/2/3/4/5, initial setting is 0.
For 2ch Stereo:
■ DIRECT (Direct)
Function: Bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP processors for pure high fidelity sound when playing 2-channel
analog sources.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and
right speakers.
• When “BASS OUT” is set to BOTH, or “FRONT SP” set to SMALL and “BASS OUT” set to SWFR, front left and right speaker low-
frequency signals are redirected to the subwoofer.
For 7ch Stereo:
Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode.
Control Range: 0 – 100%
■ CT LEVEL (Center level)
■ SL LEVEL (Surround left level)
■ SR LEVEL (Surround right level)
■ SB LEVEL (Surround back level)
■ PL LEVEL (Presence left level)
■ PR LEVEL (Presence level)
For PRO LOGIC IIx Music and PRO LOGIC II Music:
■ PANORAMA (Panorama)
Function: Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.
Choices: OFF, ON
■ DIMENSION (Dimension)
Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard).
■ CENTER WIDTH (Center width)
Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the
center image towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only
from front left and right speakers)
Initial setting: 3
This parameter can be set only when SUR.STANDARD is selected.
Notes
Note
92
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
For DTS Neo:6 Music:
■ C. IMAGE (Center image)
Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.
Control range: 0 to 1.0
Initial setting: 0.3
This parameter can be set only when SUR.STANDARD is selected.
Note
TROUBLESHOOTING
93
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the
nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
■ General
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
This unit fails to turn
on when STANDBY/
ON (or SYSTEM
POWER) is pressed,
or enters the standby
mode soon after the
power has been
turned on.
The power cord is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cord firmly.
—
The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers.
74
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit
and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for
each connection does not touch anything other than
its respective connection.
11-14
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
or strong static electricity).
Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the
power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use
it normally.
—
On-screen display
does not appear.
The setting for the on-screen display is set
to “DISPLAY OFF”.
Select the full display or short display mode.
59
“GRAY BACK” in SET MENU is set to
OFF, and no video signal is currently
being received.
Set “GRAY BACK” to AUTO to always show the
OSD.
71
No sound Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
15-20
The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone.
24
The input mode is set to DTS or
ANALOG.
Select AUTO.
37
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with INPUT,
MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote
control) or the input selector buttons.
30
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
12
The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or
B.
30
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
—
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation button of this unit to
resume audio output, then adjust the volume.
31
The input mode is set to ANALOG while
playing a source encoded with a DTS
signal.
Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS.
37
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being received from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
unit.
—
No picture The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
Turn on the video conversion function.
71
94
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the impedance selector setting is correct.
74
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again.
—
The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute.
31
Only the speaker on
one side can be
heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
12
Incorrect balance settings in SET MENU. Adjust the SPEAKER LEVEL settings.
66
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound from the
effect speakers.
The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn them on.
36
You are using a source or program
combination that does not output sound
from all channels.
Try another sound field program.
56
No sound from the
center speaker.
The output level of the center speaker is
set to minimum.
Raise the level of the center speaker.
66
“CENTER SP” in SET MENU is set to
NONE.
Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker.
64
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for
7ch Stereo) has been selected.
Try another sound field program.
56
No sound from the
surround speakers.
The output level of the surround speakers
is set to minimum.
Raise the output level of the surround speakers.
66
“SUR. L/R SP” in SET MENU is set to
NONE.
Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and
right speakers.
64
A monaural source is being played with
STRAIGHT.
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn on the sound
fields.
—
No sound from the
surround back
speakers.
Presence speakers are selected. Select surround back speakers in SUR. B L/R SP.
65
“SUR. L/R SP” in SET MENU is set to
NONE.
If the surround left and right speakers are set to
NONE, the surround back speaker setting is
automatically set to NONE. Select the appropriate
setting for the surround speakers.
64
“SUR. B L/R SP” in SET MENU is set to
NONE.
Select LRGx1 or SMLx1.
65
No sound from the
subwoofer.
“LFE/BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set
to FRNT when a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being played.
Select SWFR or BOTH.
65
“LFE/BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set
to SWFR or FRNT when a 2-channel
source is being played.
Select BOTH.
65
The source does not contain low bass
signals.
95
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator on
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.
—
The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS.
37
A “humming” sound
can be heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.
Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the
GND terminal of this unit.
19
The volume level is
low while playing a
record.
The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.
The turntable should be connected to this unit through
an MC-head amplifier.
19
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the OUT
(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.
Turn on the power to the component.
—
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to this
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack.
The source component is not connected to
this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks.
15-19
Some components cannot record the
Dolby Digital or DTS sources.
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT jacks.
The source component is not connected to
this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
15-19
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings on this
unit cannot be
changed.
“MEMORY GUARD” in SET MENU is
set to ON.
Select OFF.
71
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and
then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
—
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
12
96
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Tuner
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency equipment,
or this unit.
This unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
There is noise when
the OSD is displayed.
The OSD may be disturbed when
displaying OSD through component video
connections.
Select OFF in CMPNT OSD.
71
This unit suddenly
turns into the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer
to page
FM
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
21
Use the manual tuning method.
40
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multipath interference.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
21
Use the manual tuning method.
40
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned in.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Preset the stations again.
40
AM
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for the best reception.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
40
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
—
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV.
—
97
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Remote control
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-
axis from the front panel.
7
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
3
The manufacturer code was not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly.
76
Try setting another code for the same manufacturer.
76
The remote control ID and this unit’s ID
do not match.
Switch the library code.
74, 76
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Program the necessary functions independently into
the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.
79
The remote control
does not “learn” new
functions.
The batteries of this remote control and/or
the other remote control are too weak.
Replace the batteries.
3
The distance between the two remote
controls is too much or too little.
Place the remote controls at the proper distance.
79
The signal coding or modulation of the
other remote control is not compatible
with this remote control.
Learning is not possible.
—
Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for
the new functions.
82
RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS
98
If you want to reset all of your unit’s parameters for any
reason, do the following. This procedure completely resets
ALL parameters, including the SET MENU, level, assign
and tuner presets.
Be sure this unit is in standby mode.
1 With the unit in the standby mode, hold down
STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel and
press STANDBY/ON.
The ADVANCED SETUP menu appears in the front
panel display.
y
To cancel the initialization procedure without making any
changes, press STANDBY/ON.
2 Rotate PROGRAM to move through the menu
and select “PRESET”.
3 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select the
desired setting.
RESET To reset the unit to its factory presets.
CANCEL To cancel without making any changes.
4 Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your
selection.
If you selected “RESET”, the unit is reset to its
factory presets and switches to standby mode.
If you selected “CANCEL”, the unit switches to
standby mode and nothing is reset.
RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS
DISPLAY
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
LEVEL
CATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
XIM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
1,4 2
1,3
(U.S.A. model)
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
STANDBY
/ON
While holding
down, press
PROGRAM
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
STANDBY
/ON
GLOSSARY
99
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3
front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has
a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By
using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more
accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The
wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum
volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the
precise sound orientation generated using digital sound
processing provide listeners with previously unheard of
excitement and realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up
to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for
your enjoyment.
■ Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a
matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the
2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby
Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks
recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with
“flyover” and “fly-around” effects.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround
software. This new technology enables a discrete 5-
channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1
center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels
(instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro
Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also
available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie
mode.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel
sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode
for movies and a Game mode for games.
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as
well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality
for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers
to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz
sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/
24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-
motion video for music programs and motion picture
soundtracks on DVD-video.
■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can
enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation
of DTS digital surround in your home. This system
produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound
(technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 surround
channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a
total of 5.1-channels). The unit incorporates DTS-ES
decoder that enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding
the surround back channel to existing 5.1-channel format.
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6
channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables
playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two
modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music
sources and “Cinema mode” for movies.
GLOSSARY
Audio formats
100
GLOSSARY
■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed
for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually
measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses
YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine
Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to
provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater
in the listening room of your own home.
■ SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without any surround speakers by
using virtual surround speakers.
It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a
minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center
speaker.
■ ITU-R
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R
recommends a standard speaker placement which is used
in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering
purposes.
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.
The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code
modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits.
The range of rates that can be played back is determined
based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by
the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the
sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies
that can be played back, and the higher the number of
quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.
Sound field programs Audio information
101
GLOSSARY
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the P
B
and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.
A monitor with component input jacks is required in order
to use the component signal for output.
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture;
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
■ S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the
S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss
and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
Video signal information
SPECIFICATIONS
102
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ....................................100 W
• Maximum Power (EIAJ)
[China, Korea and General models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................140 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 Ω .......................................................135/170/200/245 W
• DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ......................................................150 W
• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................110 W
• Damping Factor (IHF)
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................120 or more
• Frequency Response
CD terminal to Front L/R ..................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ...... 0.02% or less
CD, etc. to Front L/R
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ............................ 0.06% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
Phono (5 mV) to REC OUT
[U.K., Europe and Australia models] .................... 81 dB or more
[Other models] ...................................................... 86 dB or more
CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ............... 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R .............................................................. 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (shorted) to Front L/R ................. 60 dB/55 dB or more
CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ........ 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency ...............................................350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±6 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency .........................................3.5 kHz
• Phones Output ......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
PHONO ................................................................. 2.5 mV/47 kΩ
CD, etc. ................................................................ 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT .............................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Output Level/Output Impedance
REC OUT ............................................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
PRE OUT ....................................................................2 V/1.2 kΩ
SUB WOOFER .......................................................... 4 V/1.7 kΩ
ZONE 2 OUTPUT
[U.S.A., Canada, Australia and
Europe models] ................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Signal Type ......................................................... PAL/NTSC
• Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................... 50 dB or more
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Composite, S-video ................................ 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB
Component ............................................. 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION*
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[General model] ....................... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ........................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• Usable Sensitivity (IHF)...................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ............................................................ 76 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 0.2%/0.3%
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ...................................................... 42 dB
• Frequency Response ........................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB
AM SECTION*
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 530 to 1710 kHz
[General model] ................................ 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] .................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz
• Usable Sensitivity ........................................................... 300 µV/m
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] .............................................. AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[China model] ................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] ................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ................................ AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[General model] ............. AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... 400 W/500 VA
[Other models] .................................................................. 440 W
• Standby Power Consumption .................................... 0.1 W or less
• AC Outlets
[U.K. and Australia models] ............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum)
[U.S.A., Canada and China models]... 2 (Total 100 W maximum)
[Europe and General models]............... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 171 x 420 mm
(17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 16-1/2”)
• Weight ............................................................ 12.5 kg (27 lbs 9 oz)
*Except Europe model
SPECIFICATIONS
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2005 All rights reserved.
RX-V757
Printed in Malaysia WE59930
RX-V757
AV Receiver
OWNER’S MANUAL
U
01EN_RX-V757_U-cv_version1.fm Page 1 Friday, December 24, 2004 4:29 PM
Documenttranscriptie
01EN_RX-V757_U-cv_version1.fm Page 1 Friday, December 24, 2004 4:29 PM U RX-V757 RX-V757 AV Receiver © 2005 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WE59930 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 i 11 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. ii CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord and outdoor antenna from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: Asia model ..................... 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ........................... 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. iii Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. CONTENTS INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS...............................................56 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 For movie/video sources.......................................... 56 For music sources .................................................... 58 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 11 Speaker placement ................................................... 11 Speaker connections ................................................ 12 Before connecting components................................ 15 Connecting video components................................. 16 Connecting audio components................................. 19 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 21 Connecting the power supply cord .......................... 22 Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 23 Turning on the power............................................... 23 AUTO SETUP....................................................... 24 Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 59 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 59 Manually adjusting speaker levels........................... 60 SET MENU ............................................................61 Using SET MENU................................................... 63 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 64 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 69 3 OPTION MENU................................................... 71 ADVANCED SETUP MENU...............................73 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................75 Control area ............................................................. 75 Setting remote control codes ................................... 76 Controlling other components ................................. 78 Programming codes from other remote controls ..... 79 Changing source names in the display window....... 80 Clearing function sets .............................................. 81 Clearing individual functions .................................. 82 ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA, AUSTRALIA AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY) ..................83 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Introduction.............................................................. 24 Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 24 Starting the setup ..................................................... 25 ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................59 BASIC OPERATION CONNECTIONS .................................................. 15 ADVANCED OPERATION PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control........................................................... 6 Using the remote control ........................................... 7 Front panel display .................................................... 8 Rear panel ................................................................ 10 Zone 2 connections .................................................. 83 Remote controlling Zone 2 ...................................... 84 BASIC OPERATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 30 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Basic operations....................................................... 30 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 32 Selecting input modes.............................................. 37 EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......86 FM/AM TUNING ................................................. 39 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS...............................................88 TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................93 RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS ........98 GLOSSARY...........................................................99 XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING .................. 45 Audio formats .......................................................... 99 Sound field programs............................................. 100 Audio information ................................................. 100 Video signal information ....................................... 101 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION What is XM Satellite Radio? ................................... 45 XM Satellite Radio connections .............................. 45 XM Satellite Radio functions .................................. 46 Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 47 Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 48 XM Satellite Radio search modes............................ 49 Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels ............ 52 ADVANCED OPERATION Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 39 Presetting stations .................................................... 40 Selecting preset stations........................................... 42 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 43 What is a sound field ............................................... 86 Changing parameter settings ................................... 86 SPECIFICATIONS.............................................102 RECORDING ....................................................... 55 1 FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 7-channel power amplifier Other features ◆ Minimum RMS output power (0.06% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω) Front: 100 W + 100 W Center: 100 W Surround: 100 W + 100 W Surround back: 100 W + 100 W ◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ A SET MENU that provides you with items for optimizing this unit for your audio/video system ◆ 8 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input ◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and PCM sources ◆ On-screen display function helpful in controlling this unit ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability ◆ Video signal conversion (Composite video ↔ S-video → Component video) capability for monitor out ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes and “learning” capability ◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility (U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models only) Sound field features ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6, DTS 96/24 decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/ Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) XM Satellite Radio ◆ XM Satellite Radio programming (using the “XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory”, sold separately) • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. 2 GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories Please check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) AM loop antenna Optimizer microphone LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China and General models) DISC SKIP VOL LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU Indoor FM antenna (Europe, Australia and Korea models) MUTE MENU TV VOL SRCH MODE BAND TV INPUT A-E/CAT. CH TV MUTE ENTER CH ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 7 A SPEAKERS B 9 0 MOVIE 4 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 8 NIGHT 10 ENT. CHP/INDEX Installing batteries in the remote control 2 1 3 1 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ / –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. Notes on batteries • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions; the operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 (U.S.A. model) VOLUME ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XM A/B/C/D/E NEXT l PRESET/TUNING/CH h SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L MONO DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM LEVEL CATEGORY INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA A B CD E F G H I J K L 1 STANDBY/ON Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Note In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 OPTIMIZER MIC jack Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see page 24). 3 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 4 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 5 A/B/C/D/E, NEXT, CATEGORY* Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when the unit is in tuner mode. Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted when the unit is not in tuner mode. 4 (U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models only) 6 PRESET/TUNING/ CH* l / h, LEVEL –/+ Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is displayed next to the band indication in the front panel display when the unit is in tuner mode. Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed. Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) when the unit is not in tuner mode. 7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning. 8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO), DISPLAY* Switches the tuning mode between automatic (AUTO indicator on) and manual (AUTO indicator off). 9 VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. 0 VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS B SPEAKERS A/B Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the corresponding button is pressed. C PRESET/TUNING (EDIT), SEARCH MODE* Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (LEVEL) between selecting preset station numbers and tuning. ■ U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models only L ZONE ON/OFF buttons MAIN Switches this unit’s operation to control the component in the main room (see page 84). ZONE 2 Switches this unit’s operation to control the component in the second room (Zone 2) (see page 84). * Available only when the unit is in the XM Satellite Radio mode (see page 45). D STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. E FM/AM, XM* Switches the reception band when the unit is in tuner mode. F PROGRAM Use to select sound field programs or adjust the bass/treble balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL). G TONE CONTROL Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left and right, center, presence and subwoofer channels (see page 31). H INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 37). I INPUT selector Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. J MULTI CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). K PURE DIRECT Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 35). 5 INTRODUCTION A PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 75. 1 2 3 TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 4 5 6 SELECT B C D E F G H POWER TV AV I AUDIO J REC DISC SKIP VOL 7 8 9 0 A LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MUTE MENU TV VOL SRCH MODE BAND TV INPUT K L A-E/CAT. CH TV MUTE ENTER CH ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 9 0 M N EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 7 A SPEAKERS B 8 NIGHT 10 ENT. CHP/INDEX 2 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 3 STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. 4 SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. 5 Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control area. 6 Display window Shows the name of the selected source component that you can control. POWER AMP 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. O 7 LEVEL, BAND Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the level. Switches the reception band when the unit is in tuner mode. 8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i /ENTER Use to select and adjust sound field program parameters or SET MENU items. Press j / i to select a preset station group (A to E) when the unit is in tuner mode. Press u / d to select a preset station number (1 to 8) when the unit is in tuner mode. 9 RETURN, MEMORY* Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the SET MENU parameters. 0 Sound field program/numeric buttons Use to select sound field programs. Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when the unit is in tuner mode. Use SELECT to playback 2-channel sources in multiple channel format (see page 34). Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1-channel playback of multi-channel software (see page 33). Use PURE DIRECT to turn on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 35). A SPEAKERS A/B Use to turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminal on the rear panel each time the corresponding button is pressed. B RE-NAME Use to change the input source name in the display window (see page 80). 6 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS D LEARN Use to set up manufacturer codes or program functions from other remote controls (see pages 76 and 79). E SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC FM/AM PRESET/TUNING EDIT A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h NEXT XIM SEARCH MODE SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT G MULTI CH IN Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external decoder (etc.). AUTO/MAN'L MONO DISPLAY INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON F INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 37). TUNING MODE CATEGORY PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM LEVEL S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 30 30 RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER Approximately 6 m (20 ft) STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE CD MULTI CH IN PHONO TUNER V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 CD-R DVD SELECT POWER POWER AMP AV TV REC AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE BAND TV INPUT CH SET MENU MUTE MENU TV VOL TV MUTE ENTER PRESET SRCH MODE CH A-E/CAT. PRESET ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY STEREO 1 EFFECT MUSIC ENTERTAIN 2 3 MOVIE 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 5 6 7 A SPEAKERS B 9 0 8 NIGHT +10 ENT. CHP/INDEX H SELECT k/n Selects another component that you can control independently of the input component selected with the input selector buttons. I AMP Selects the AMP mode. You must select the AMP mode to control the main unit. J VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. K MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. ■ Handling the remote control • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperature, such as near a heater or stove – extremely low temperatures – dusty places L SET MENU, SRCH MODE* Activates the SET MENU function. M ON SCREEN Selects the display mode of the on-screen display (OSD) this unit sends to your video monitor. N STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. O NIGHT, ENT.* Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 35). * Available only when the unit is in the XM Satellite Radio mode (see page 45). 7 INTRODUCTION C CLEAR Use to clear functions acquired when using the learn and rename features, or setting remote control codes (see page 81). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display 1 t 2 96 24 DVR/VCR2 q PL PCM D VCR1 4 5 V-AUX 6 DTV/CBL 7 DVD STANDARD ZONE2 NIGHT q PL 89 MD/CD-R 0A TUNER B CD C PHONO YPAO HD AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME VIRTUAL SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE q DIGITAL q EX 3 SP AB HiFi DSP PTY HOLD PS PTY RT CT EON SLEEP dB ft 96/24 q PL x mS dB E F GH I J L C R LFE SL SB SR K LM N O (U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K. and Europe models only) 1 Decoder indicators When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective indicator lights up. 0 STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit. 2 VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 36). A MEMORY indicator Flashes to show that a station can be stored. 3 SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 31). 4 Input source indicators A cursor lights to show the current input source. 5 Sound field indicators Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields. Presence DSP sound field Listening position Left surround DSP sound field Right surround DSP sound field Surround back DSP sound field 6 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. 7 YPAO indicator Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the auto setup speaker settings are used without any modifications. 8 AUTO indicator Lights up when this unit is in automatic tuning mode. 9 TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station. 8 B MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on. C VOLUME level indication Indicates the current volume level. D PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. E STANDARD Lights up when a decoder is selected (see page 34). F NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select night listening mode. G SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected. H Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. I HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program. J Multi-information display Shows the current sound field program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS K SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. INTRODUCTION L 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. M LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. N Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. ■ U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe model only O ZONE 2 indicator Lights up when Zone 2 power is on. 9 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 1 2 3 4 COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB 9 TUNER Y 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT DVD AUDIO 5 6 7 8 AUDIO GND AM ANT DTV /CBL PHONO DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R GND VIDEO CD XM MONITOR OUT DVD PRE OUT CENTER OPTICAL IN DTV/ CBL (PLAY) CONTROL OUT OUT IN (REC) OUT VCR 1 FRONT DVD FRONT SWITCHED IN MD /CD-R MD/CD-R AC OUTLETS REMOTE SINGLE SURROUND SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK +12V 15mA MAX. PRESENCE/ ZONE 2 SPEAKERS OUT A DTV/CBL SURROUND IN DVR/ VCR 2 CD SURROUND BACK SURROUND OUT B DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT FRONT SUB WOOFER CENTER MULTI CH INPUT ZONE 2 OUTPUT CENTER SURROUND BACK VIDEO S VIDEO MONITOR OUT (U.S.A. model) 0 A B C 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks See page 19 for details. 2 Audio component jacks See page 19 for connection information. 3 Video component jacks See pages 16 and 18 for connection information. 4 Antenna terminals (except U.K. model) See page 21 for connection information. 5 PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals (U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models) PRESENCE speaker terminals (other models) See page 13 for connection information. 6 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models only) See page 83 for details. 7 XM jack See page 45 for connection information. 8 CONTROL OUT jack (U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K. and Europe models only) This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use. 10 D 9 AC OUTLET(S) Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 22). 0 DIGITAL INPUT jacks See pages 16, 18 and 19 for details. A MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 17 for connection information. B ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models only) These jacks output analog signals only. See page 83 for details. TUNER INPUT jacks (U.K. model only) C PRE OUT jacks See page 20 for connection information. D Speaker terminals See page 13 for connection information. ■ General models only VOLTAGE SELECTOR See page 22 for details. SPEAKER SETUP SPEAKER SETUP Surround speakers (SR and SL) Speaker placement ITU-R* The speaker layout below shows the standard speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio sources. The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL) * ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). PR C FR FL 30˚ Subwoofer SL SR 60˚ SL 80˚ SBL SR SBR 30 cm (12 in) or more The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. Presence speakers (PR and PL) 1.8 m (6 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA DSP (see page 56). These effects include sounds that filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 - 1 m (1 - 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Front speakers (FR and FL) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. 11 PREPARATION PL The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in) apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as the front speakers. SPEAKER SETUP Speaker connections 5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. 3 4 5 CAUTION • If you will use 4 or 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 4 ohms before using (see page 23). • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the power of this unit is off. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) ■ Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or PRESENCE speaker terminals 3 1 Open the tab. 2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each terminal. 3 Return the tab to secure the wire. 10 mm (3/8") 1 1 2 2 ■ Banana plug connections 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8") of insulation from the end of each speaker cable. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 3 Unscrew the knob. 4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. (With the exception of U.K. and Europe models) First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug (With the exception of U.K. and Europe models) y You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 and PRESENCE speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one banana plug connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not attempt to close the tabs after connecting the banana plugs. 12 SPEAKER SETUP Subwoofer system Presence speakers Right Left 1 2 3 Surround speakers Right Left 4 5 PREPARATION PRE OUT FRONT SURROUND CENTER SINGLE SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK PRESENCE/ ZONE 2 SPEAKERS A SURROUND B FRONT CENTER SURROUND BACK (U.S.A. model) 6 7 Front speakers (B) 8 10 9 Center speaker Right Left Surround back speakers Right Left Front speakers (A) You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously. • The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only operate when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES or Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder is turned on. • The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields are selected. 13 SPEAKER SETUP ■ FRONT terminals Connect one or two speaker systems (6, 7) to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to the FRONT A or B terminals. ■ CENTER terminals Connect a center speaker (8) to these terminals. 2 ■ SURROUND terminals Connect surround speakers (4, 5) to these terminals. 3 6 8 ■ SUBWOOFER jack Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (1), such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. ■ SURROUND BACK terminals Connect surround back speakers (9, 10) to these terminals. If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the left (L) terminals. ■ PRESENCE terminals Connect presence speakers (2, 3) to these terminals. * If you are using either the U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K. or Europe model, you can also use these speakers as Zone 2 speakers (see page 72). 14 7 1 5 Speaker layout 4 10 9 CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Before connecting components CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are complete. Dust protection cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. ■ Video jacks For analog signals left analog cables L right analog cables R For digital signals optical cables O coaxial cables C For video signals video cables V S-video cables S This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor. The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks on this unit are automatically converted for output through the VIDEO jacks. When VIDEO CONV. is set to ON (see page 71), signals input through the VIDEO jacks can be output through the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. Likewise, signals input through the S VIDEO jacks can also be output through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y PVR component video cables PVB V Y ■ Analog jacks You can input analog signals from audio components by connecting audio pin cable to the analog jacks on this unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. ■ Digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals. S VIDEO jacks For S-Video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color reproduction. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in picture reproduction. Signal flow inside this unit Input Output (MONITOR OUT) COMPONENT VIDEO Note S VIDEO This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. VIDEO Only when VIDEO CONV. is set to ON (see page 71). Note When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority. 15 PREPARATION ■ Cable indications CONNECTIONS Connecting video components ■ Connections for DVD playback Note Be sure to connect your video source components in the same way you connect your video monitor to this unit if VIDEO CONV. (see page 71) is set to OFF. For example, if you connect your video monitor to this unit using a VIDEO connection, connect your video source components to this unit using the VIDEO connections. (Even when V CONV. is set to OFF, S-video signals input from your video source component are automatically converted to composite signals in this unit.) Coaxial out Optical out Video out DVD player Audio out C O R L V PR S COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB PB Y Y DVD AUDIO VIDEO Video in MONITOR OUT DVD DVD DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT VIDEO S VIDEO MONITOR OUT (U.S.A. model) 16 Video monitor CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks This unit is equipped with 8 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND, left and right SURROUND BACK and SUB WOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. For 6-channel input For 8-channel input (U.S.A. model) (U.S.A. model) FRONT SURROUND SURROUND PREPARATION FRONT SURROUND BACK SUB WOOFER SUB WOOFER CENTER MULTI CH INPUT R L Subwoofer out R L R L Center out Front out Multi-format player/ External decoder CENTER MULTI CH INPUT Subwoofer out R L R L Center out Surround out Front out Multi-format player/ Surround External decoder back out Surround out Notes • When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When headphones are used, only front left and right channels are output. 17 CONNECTIONS ■ Connections for other video components Notes • Be sure to connect your video source components in the same way you connect your video monitor to this unit if VIDEO CONV. (see page 71) is set to OFF. For example, if you connect your video monitor to this unit using a VIDEO connection, connect your video source components to this unit using the VIDEO connections. • Converted video signals are only output to MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording, you must make the same type of video connections (i.e., S-video) between each component. Video out Optical out Cable TV or satellite tuner Audio out O R V L PR S PB Y (U.S.A. model) COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y AUDIO DTV/ CBL VIDEO Video in MONITOR OUT Video monitor DTV/ CBL IN VCR 1 OUT DTV/CBL COAXIAL VIDEO S VIDEO MONITOR OUT DIGITAL INPUT R L R L V Audio in Audio out or S V or S Video in DVD recorder or VCR Video out VIDEO AUX ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a game console or video camera, to this unit. S VIDEO VIDEO L S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL R O Optical out Audio out R Audio out L Video out S-video out 18 Game console or video camera CONNECTIONS Connecting audio components ■ Connections for audio components Turntable GND Audio out AUDIO PREPARATION R L AUDIO PHONO DIGITAL OUTPUT Optical in MD/CD-R GND Audio out CD L O R Optical out OPTICAL O Audio out CD player IN (PLAY) MD/ CD-R MD/CD-R OUT (REC) L MD recorder or tape deck R L R Coaxial out Audio in C CD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT (U.S.A. model) ■ Connecting a turntable y PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some record players. 19 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to an external amplifier If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows. Notes • When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for output to an external amplifier, do not make connections to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum. • The signals output through the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings. • If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SP B is set to ZONE B (see page 72), signals will only be output from the FRONT PRE OUT jacks. 1 23 4 PRE OUT FRONT SURROUND CENTER SINGLE SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK 5 1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel line output jacks. 2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel line output jacks. 3 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel line output jack. 4 SURROUND BACK PRE OUT jacks Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. 5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. Notes • Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding speaker terminals. • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level using the remote control (see “Manually adjusting speaker levels” on page 60). • Some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the SPEAKER SET (see page 64) and LFE/BASS OUT (see page 65) settings. 20 CONNECTIONS Connecting the FM and AM antennas Both FM and AM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. ■ FREQUENCY STEP (General model only) Be sure to set the frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area (see page 73). Notes Indoor FM antenna (included) AM loop antenna (included) 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it to the terminals on this unit. 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. 21 PREPARATION TUNER • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. CONNECTIONS Connecting the power supply cord ■ Connecting the AC power cord ■ Memory back-up Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet. The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) U.K. and Australia models ................................... 1 outlet Korea model ..............................................................None Other models ........................................................2 outlets Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your other components to this unit. Power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). The outlet(s) supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. For information on the maximum power (total power consumption of components), see “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 102. ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: Asia model ......................... 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ..... 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz VOLTAGE SELECTOR VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model) 22 CONNECTIONS Speaker impedance setting Turning on the power When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. CAUTION If you are using 4 or 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to 4 or 6 ohms as follows before turning on the power. Be sure this unit is in the standby mode. VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT 1 Turn off the power to this unit, and while holding down STRAIGHT (EFFECT), press STANDBY/ON. This unit turns on, and “SP IMP.” appears in the front panel display. SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 1 STRAIGHT While holding down, press STANDBY /ON TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR 1 POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE MULTI CH IN A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SP IMP. 2 LEARN SYSTEM EFFECT SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) repeatedly to select “4 Ω MIN”. 1 STRAIGHT Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. EFFECT SYSTEM STANDBY /ON 3 or POWER Press STANDBY/ON to turn off the power. Front panel Remote control STANDBY /ON 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. The setting you made is reflected the next time this unit’s power is turned on. 23 PREPARATION (U.S.A. model) AUTO SETUP AUTO SETUP Introduction This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Optimizer microphone setup 1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. (U.S.A. model) OPTIMIZER MIC Notes PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM A/B/C/D/E NEXT l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL CATEGORY PROGRAM • Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the auto setup procedure. • If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen, follow the troubleshooting on page 28. PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE STANDBY /ON EFFECT SILENT CINEMA YPAO performs the following checks and makes appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible sound from your system. WIRING: Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. SIZE: Checks the speakers frequency response and sets the crossover/high cut frequency for the subwoofer to improve the sound relationship between the speakers and the subwoofer. DISTANCE: Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the delay of each channel so that the sound from each speaker reaches the listening position at the same time. Also checks the phase of each speaker. EQUALIZING: Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers for some channels or have a room with unique sonic characteristics. YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics. LEVEL: Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each speaker. 24 Notes • After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone. • The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. – Keep it away from direct sunlight. – Do not place it on top of this unit. 2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone head upward, at your normal listening position. If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer mic at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. Optimizer microphone position AUTO SETUP Starting the setup 5 For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. Press u / d to select SETUP, then press j / i to select the desired setting. 1 AUTO:MENU y p If your subwoofer has adjustable volume and crossover/high cut frequency controls, set the volume between 9 and 11 o’clock (as viewed on a conventional clockface) and set the crossover/high cut frequency to the maximum. CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT VOLUME RELOAD MIN MAX MAX MIN Subwoofer UNDO 1 Switch on this unit and your video monitor. Make sure the OSD is displayed. 2 Press AMP. DEFAULT y You can choose RELOAD or UNDO only if you have already performed the auto setup procedure. AMP 6 3 To perform the auto setup procedure (YPAO). To reload the last auto setup (YPAO) settings to override any manual changes. To undo the last auto setup (YPAO) and restore the previous settings. To restore the factory preset (default) setup parameters. Press SET MENU. Press d to select “START”, then press ENTER to start the setup procedure. The screen changes as follows. SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE y When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items (see page 60). 1 AUTO:MENU SETUP;;; ;;;;;;;AUTO . START p 4 Press u / d to select AUTO SETUP, then press ENTER. p Automatic processing of all items [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Start PRESET/CH SET MENU TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH 2 AUTO:CHECK .;AUTOSETUP ;MANUALSETUP ;SIGNAL INFO. TV VOL p p RESULT:EXIT PRESET/CH TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH p .WARNING (3) RESULT SP : 5/4/0.1 DIST: 10.0/ 12.0ft LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB .>SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p TV VOL p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter INITIALZING . WIRING .SIZE/DISTANCE .EQUALIZING .LEVEL CHECK CH=CENTER |||||;;;;;;;; []:Exit 25 PREPARATION AUTO p . SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO START Automatic processing of all items [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select AUTO SETUP The results displayed in the RESULT:EXIT screen are as follows: SP DIST y You can display the detailed result information by using d and ENTER to select “RESULT”. In the detailed result information screen, you can switch information by pressing u / d / j / i. 7 Press j / i to select SET or CANCEL, then press ENTER to return to the SET MENU screen. RESULT:EXIT SET CANCEL p p WARNING (3) RESULT SP : 5/4/0.1 DIST: 10.0/ 12.0ft LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB .>SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter To apply the auto setup (YPAO) settings. To cancel the auto setup (YPAO) without making any changes. y If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually adjust each setup parameter, use the manual setup parameters (see page 52). Notes • If E-10 appears during testing, restart the procedure from step 3. • To cancel the auto setup procedure before completion, press u. 26 ERROR .E-9:USER CANCEL . .Don't operate .any function. .>RETRYEXIT []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter RETRY EXIT p • If you selected AUTO in step 5, “WAITING” appears when the auto setup procedure is started, then loud test tones are output from each speaker in turn. • If you selected DEFAULT, RELOAD or UNDO in step 5, no test tones are output. • If an ERROR screen appears, see “If an error screen appears” on page 26. • If a WARNING screen appears, see “If a warning screen appears” on page 27. Use u / d / j / i to select RETRY or EXIT, then press ENTER. p LVL The number of connected speakers displayed in the order: Front/Back/Subwoofer The distance of the speakers from this unit displayed in the order: Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance The speaker output level displayed in the order: Lowest output level/Highest output level ■ If an error screen appears To retry the auto setup procedure. To exit auto setup. AUTO SETUP ■ If a warning screen appears 1 Press ENTER to display detailed information about the warning. Press j / i to switch between warning messages. RESULT:EXIT p p .WARNING (3) RESULT SP : 5/4/0.1 DIST: 10.0/ 12.0ft LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB .>SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter PREPARATION WARNING:W-1 .<OUT OF PHASE> .Reverse Channel .FL __ .CENTER .PL PR .SL SR .SBL SBR [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return W-1 example screen For details about each message, see page 29. y • Warnings let you know about potential problems detected during auto setup. Warnings will not cancel the auto setup. • The number of warnings is displayed to the right of “WARNING”. • When the warning is not applicable to a speaker, “– –” is displayed. 2 When you are finished, press ENTER to return to the RESULT:EXIT screen. Continue from step 7 on page 26. Notes • If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, perform auto setup again to re-calibrate your system. • Depending on listening environments, SWFR PHASE:REV appears in AUTO:CHECK and SUBWOOFER PHASE parameter in the SETMENU (see page 66) is automatically set to REVERSE. To select the desired setting, change the SUBWOOFER PHASE parameter in the SETMENU. • In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. 27 AUTO SETUP ■ Troubleshooting for auto setup procedure Before auto setup Error message Cause Remedy Connect MIC Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. Unplug HP Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones. Errors during auto setup Error message Cause Remedy E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not detected. • Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A/B. • Check the front left and right speaker connections. • Turn on the power to the external amplifier (when the front speaker signals are output from an external amplifier). E-2:NO SURR. SP Only one surround channel signal is detected. • Check the surround speaker connections. E-3:NO PRES. SP Only one presence channel signal is detected. • Check the presence speaker connections. E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. • Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. E-5:NOISY Background noise is too loud. • Try the auto setup procedure in a quiet environment. • Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners (etc.) or move them away from the optimizer microphone. E-6:CHECK SUR. Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. • Connect surround speakers when you use (a) surround back speaker(s). • Check the surround speaker connections. E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the auto setup procedure. • Do not touch the optimizer microphone during the auto setup procedure. E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. • Check the microphone setting. • Check the speaker connections and placement. E-9:USER CANCEL The auto setup procedure was cancelled due to user activity. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. Do not adjust VOLUME (etc.) during the auto setup procedure. E-10:INTERNAL ERROR A DSP communication error or hangup occurred. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. 28 AUTO SETUP Warnings after auto setup Press j / i to display detailed information about individual warnings. Warning message Remedy W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. • Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ / –). W-2:OVER 24m The distance between the speaker and the listening position is 24 m (80 ft) or more. • Move the speaker closer to the listening position. • Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ / –). W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. (No level correction is made.) • Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers are set in locations with similar conditions. • Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ / –). • Use speakers of similar quality and efficiency. If the ERROR or WARNING screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then perform the auto setup procedure again. If warning W-1 appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal. If warning W-2 or W-3 appears, no corrections are made. If error E-10 occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center. 29 PREPARATION • • • • Cause PLAYBACK PLAYBACK Basic operations 4 (U.S.A. model) INPUT VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT SPEAKERS A B MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO STRAIGHT A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD or LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES Select the input source. Rotate INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input you desire. INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA Front panel 1 3 7 4 6 REC TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN 1 4 STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD VOL PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MUTE DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER MENU CD PHONO VOLUME TV VOL SRCH MODE BAND TV INPUT SP A dB A-E/CAT. CH CH TV MUTE ENTER ON SCREEN L RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY POWER POWER TV AV R STRAIGHT TV VOL SELECT 3 The current input source name and input mode appear in the front panel display and video monitor for a few seconds. 6 AUDIO DISC SKIP SYSTEM POWER Remote control AMP REC EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 7 A SPEAKERS B 9 MOVIE 4 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 7 Selected input source Input mode 8 NIGHT 0 10 ENT. CHP/INDEX 3 1 Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. 3 or Remote control Press SPEAKERS A or B (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press SPEAKERS A or B on the remote control). Each press turns the respective speakers on or off. AMP SPEAKERS B A A SPEAKERS B or 30 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. POWER Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Front panel 6 or Front panel 2 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operating instructions for the component. VOLUME SYSTEM STANDBY /ON 5 9 0 Remote control Front panel VOL Remote control PLAYBACK ■ To adjust the tone 7 Select a sound field program if desired. Use PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press one of the sound field program buttons) to select a sound field program. See page 56 for details about sound field programs. PROGRAM Front panel You can adjust the tonal quality of your front left and right, center, and subwoofer speakers or headphones (when connected). Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select TREBLE or BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease. • Select TREBLE to adjust the high frequency response. • Select BASS to adjust the low frequency response. TONE CONTROL PROGRAM y or Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. STEREO AMP MUSIC 1 2 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 ENTERTAIN 3 0 4 Notes EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 7 A SPEAKERS B 9 MOVIE 8 NIGHT 10 ENT. CHP/INDEX ■ To listen with headphones (“SILENT CINEMA”) “SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in the front panel display. Notes ■ To mute the sound Press MUTE on the remote control. The MUTE indicator blinks in the front panel display. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again (or press VOL –/+). The MUTE indicator disappears from the display. MUTE y You can adjust the muting level (see page 68). • This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. • “SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when PURE DIRECT or the 2ch Stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode. 31 BASIC OPERATION Remote control • TONE CONTROL is not effective during playback in the PURE DIRECT mode, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected (page 35). • When TONE BYPASS is set to “AUTO” (page 68), and BASS and TREBLE are set to 0 dB, audio output automatically bypasses this unit's tone control circuitry. PLAYBACK ■ Selecting MULTI CH INPUT Press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel display and video monitor. MULTI CH INPUT Selecting sound field programs ■ Front panel operation MULTI CH IN or VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC Front panel PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT Remote control PHONES SPEAKERS A B MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM STRAIGHT INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA (U.S.A. model) MULTI CH INPUT Note When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT (or one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” in the front panel display. PROGRAM Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display and video monitor. PROGRAM ■ Playing video sources in the background You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Use the input selector buttons on the remote control to select a video source, then select an audio source. A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Audio sources Video sources Note If you want to enjoy audio from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source, then press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control). 32 DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME SP A HiFi DSP TV Sports Program name dB L R PLAYBACK ■ Remote control operation PRESET/CH LEVEL ■ Enjoying multi-channel software SET MENU TITLE If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders. MUTE MENU TV VOL TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR SRCH MODE BAND TV INPUT LEARN A-E/CAT. SYSTEM CH CH TV MUTE ENTER POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD STEREO 1 2 DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD STANDARD SELECT 5 6 ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY EFFECT MUSIC ENTERTAIN 4 7 8 A SPEAKERS B 9 NIGHT 0 POWER TV POWER ENT. 10 CHP/INDEX SELECT AMP Sound field program buttons MOVIE 3 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press EXTD SUR. on the remote control to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel playback. AMP AV REC EXTD SUR. AMP AUDIO 7 Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press one of the sound field program buttons to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display. To select a decoder, press j / i repeatedly when PLIIxMusic (etc.) is displayed. PRESET/CH TV VOL STEREO MUSIC 1 2 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 AMP ENTERTAIN MOVIE 3 4 CH TV MUTE ENTER CH EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 7 8 0 NIGHT ENT. 10 CHP/INDEX DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME SP A HiFi DSP TV Sports dB L R Program name y Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with that source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/ 24 signals) will be sampled down to 48 kHz, then sound field programs will be applied. Auto (AUTO) When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels. If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/ 7.1 channels. Decoders (select with j / i) You can select from the following decoders depending on the format of the software you are playing. PLIIxMovie For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder. PLIIxMusic For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. EX/ES For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the DTS-ES decoder. EX For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. Off (OFF) Decoders are not used to create 6.1/7.1 channels. y When “SUR. B SP” is set to SMLx1 or LRGx1 (see page 65), the surround back channel will be output from the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. 33 BASIC OPERATION TV VOL A SPEAKERS B 9 PLAYBACK When you select the SUR. STANDARD program: Notes • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag) which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select a decoder (PLIIx Movie, PLIIx Music, EX/ES or EX) manually. • 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD SUR. is pressed in the following cases: – When “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 64) or “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 65) is set to NONE. – When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is being played. – When the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel signals. – When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – When “2ch Stereo” or PURE DIRECT is selected. • When the power of this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to AUTO. • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to NONE (see page 65). • PLIIxMovie cannot be selected when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to SMLx1 or LRGx1 (see page 65). ■ Enjoying 2-channel software in surround Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multiple channels. Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press STANDARD on the remote control to switch between the SUR. STANDARD and SUR. ENHANCED programs. STANDARD AMP 5 Or press MOVIE to select the MOVIE THEATER program. MOVIE 4 PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software. PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software. PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software. PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software. PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software. PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software. Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. When you select the SUR. ENHANCED or MOVIE THEATER program: PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software. PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software. Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. y Press SELECT on the remote control to select the decoder. SELECT 6 You can select from the following modes depending on the type of software you are playing and your personal preference. 34 You can also select a decoder by pressing j / i on the remote control when the decoder type is displayed in the short message display. Note The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to NONE (see page 59). PLAYBACK ■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound (PURE DIRECT) PURE DIRECT allows you to bypass this unit’s decoders and DSP processors, and turn off the video circuitry and front panel display to enjoy pure high fidelity sound from analog and PCM sources. Press PURE DIRECT (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press PURE DIRECT on the remote control) to activate pure direct. The indicator around the front panel button lights up. ■ Night listening modes The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the type of material you are playing. Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press NIGHT repeatedly on the remote control to select cinema or music. When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in the front panel display lights up. NIGHT AMP PURE DIRECT AMP or Front panel PURE DIRECT ENT. 8 Remote control y The front panel display switches on momentarily when an operation is performed. • Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select OFF if you do not want to use this function. Press j / i to adjust the effect level while NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed. This adjusts the level of compression. Notes PRESET/CH • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in this mode. • When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input, this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog input. • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • The following operations are not possible during PURE DIRECT operation: – switching the sound field program – displaying the OSD – adjusting SET MENU parameters – all video functions (video conversion etc.) • PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is set to the standby mode. TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL Remote control Effect.Lvl:MID • Select MIN for minimum compression. • Select MID for standard compression. • Select MAX for maximum compression. y NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored independently. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT or MULTI CH INPUT (even though the NIGHT indicator lights up when PURE DIRECT is selected). • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. 35 BASIC OPERATION To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again. The indicator around the front panel button goes out and the previous settings are restored. CHP/INDEX PLAYBACK ■ Downmixing to 2 channels ■ Listening to unprocessed input signals You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback even from multichannel sources. In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. Rotate PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch Stereo. Press STRAIGHT to select STRAIGHT. STRAIGHT PROGRAM AMP or Front panel STRAIGHT or STEREO EFFECT EFFECT 1 Front panel Remote control Remote control STRAIGHT y Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the display when you want to turn the sound effect back on. You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or BOTH is selected in “BASS OUT”. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP 2ch Stereo Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. If you set “SUR. L/R SP” to NONE (see page 64), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when “SUR. L/R SP” is set to NONE (see page 64) in the following cases: – When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. – When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. 36 PLAYBACK Notes Selecting input modes • When playing a DTS-CD/LD, be sure to set the INPUT MODE to DTS. • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player depending on the player. This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the following to select the type of input signals you want to use. 1 Rotate INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source. ■ Displaying information about the input source You can display the type, format and sampling frequency of the current input signal. INPUT PHONO MULTI CH IN A B V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD or Front panel 2 1 Select the input source. A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Remote control Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode. In most cases, use AUTO. DVR/VCR2 VCR1 STRAIGHT EFFECT Remote control V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME SP A dB L Input source AUTO DTS ANALOG Press STRAIGHT. INPUT MODE or Front panel BASIC OPERATION 2 INPUT MODE STRAIGHT R Input mode Automatically selects input signals in the following order: 1) Digital signals* 2) Analog signals Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no sound is output. Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. * If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate decoder. y You can adjust the default input mode of this unit (see page 70). 37 PLAYBACK 3 Press u / d to display the following information about the input signal. PRESET/CH TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL (Format) in fs rate flg 38 Signal format display. When the unit cannot detect a digital signal it automatically switches to analog input. Number of source channels in the input signal. For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/LFE”. Sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to detect the sampling frequency “Unknown” appears. Bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears. Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby Digital signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. FM/AM TUNING FM/AM TUNING Automatic and manual tuning 3 There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. TUNING MODE ■ Automatic tuning (U.S.A. model) PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO AUTO DISPLAY Lights up PRESET/TUNING EDIT LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES AUTO/MAN'L MONO If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL SEARCH MODE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 4 1 3 R/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R BASIC OPERATION 3 2 TUNER AUTO TUNED SP A 1 Rotate INPUT to select TUNER as the input source. INPUT 4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l to tune into a lower frequency. l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. R/VCR2 FM/AM VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER AUTO TUNED FM or AM SP A When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. 39 FM/AM TUNING ■ Manual tuning If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an FM station will automatically switch the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. 1 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 as described in “Automatic tuning”. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. Presetting stations ■ Automatically presetting FM stations You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h NEXT AUTO/MAN'L MONO AUTO DISPLAY Disappears PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM TUNING MODE INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. SILENT CINEMA (U.S.A. model) 1 1 PRESET/TUNING EDIT 3 Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM FM SEARCH MODE R/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD 2 MD/CD-R TUNER AUTO TUNED SP A 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to l PRESET/TUNING/CH h continue searching. LEVEL AUTO Lights up DISPLAY If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. PRESET/TUNING EDIT SEARCH MODE R/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER AUTO TUNED SP A 40 FM/AM TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations 3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the frequency currently displayed and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) manually. VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT SPEAKERS A B MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES INPUT STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT MEMORY SILENT CINEMA MAN'L/AUTO FM (U.S.A. model) 3 DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER AUTO TUNED CD MEMORY 4 2,5 PHONO VOLUME SP A dB L R 1 DVR/VCR2 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED PHONO VOLUME SP A dB L Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually, and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations”. VCR1 R When tuned into a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. 2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM MEMORY Flashes Automatic preset tuning options: You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING/CH l to begin tuning toward the lower frequencies. 3 Press A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E NEXT CATEGORY DVR/VCR2 Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again by using the presetting station methods. VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED CD MEMORY PHONO VOLUME SP A dB L R Preset group 41 BASIC OPERATION When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. Tune into a station. See page 39 for tuning instructions. FM/AM TUNING 4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. Selecting preset stations You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. l PRESET/TUNING/CH h VOLUME LEVEL OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT SPEAKERS A B MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES STRAIGHT INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED CD MEMORY PHONO VOLUME SP A (U.S.A. model) dB L R 2 1 Preset number LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MUTE 1 MENU TV VOL BAND TV INPUT SRCH MODE CH CH A-E/CAT. 5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and MEMORY frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. MAN'L/AUTO FM DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED CD MEMORY PHONO VOLUME SP A dB L R TV MUTE ENTER ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN 2 DISPLAY MEMORY EFFECT y When performing this operation with the remote control, first press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode. 1 Press A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) (or A–E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. PRESET/CH TV VOL A/B/C/D/E 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. NEXT or CH TV MUTE ENTER CH CATEGORY TV VOL Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. 42 Front panel Remote control FM/AM TUNING 2 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET u / d on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the TUNED indicator lights up. Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. PRESET/CH VOLUME TV VOL l PRESET/TUNING/CH h OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT or LEVEL CH TV MUTE ENTER MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY CH PROGRAM PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA Front panel TV VOL (U.S.A. model) Remote control 2,4 DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD 1,3 1,3 Select preset station “E1”. See “Selecting preset stations”. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. PRESET/TUNING EDIT SEARCH MODE DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED CD MEMORY SP A 3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E LEVEL NEXT CATEGORY DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED CD MEMORY SP A 43 BASIC OPERATION 1 TUNED SP A FM/AM TUNING 4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. PRESET/TUNING EDIT SEARCH MODE DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED SP A 44 CD XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING What is XM Satellite Radio? XM Satellite Radio is the satellite radio service with millions of listeners across the U.S. Broadcasting live daily. XM’s channel lineup includes more than 130 digital channels of choice from coast to coast: 68 commercialfree music channels, featuring hip hop to opera, classical to country, bluegrass to blues; 33 channels of premier sports, talk, comedy, children’s and entertainment programming; and more than 20 channels of the traffic and weather information for major metropolitan areas nationwide. XM Satellite Radio connections ■ Connecting the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory Connect the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear of this unit. (For details, see the operating instructions provided with the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory). XM jack Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you will need to set up an account and activate service with XM using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio” on page 47. For further information on XM Satellite Radio services, see the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com”. XM/DT BASIC OPERATION Notes • The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii). • XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory and monthly subscription are sold separately. For details, see the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com”. Notes • For information on obtaining the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory, see the website at “http:// www.xmradio.com” or visit your local retailer that sells XM Ready products. • To ensure optimal reception of XM’s satellite signal, the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory should be placed at or near a southerly facing window with nothing obstructing its path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. 45 XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Remote control functions XM Satellite Radio functions Note This section describes the functions of each control used for XM Satellite Radio tuning. The following controls are only available when the unit is in the TUNER mode. To switch to the TUNER mode, press TUNER to select TUNER as input source. ■ Front panel functions TV AV REC AUDIO Note DISC SKIP VOL The following controls are only available when the unit is in the TUNER mode and the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory is connected to the XM jack on the rear of this unit (For details, see “XM Satellite Radio connections”). PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h NEXT SEARCH MODE XM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO 1 2 3 LEVEL LEVEL DISPLAY 4 SET MENU MUTE MENU 5 TV VOL SRCH MODE A-E/CAT. CH TV MUTE ENTER CH ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN EFFECT MUSIC 1 2 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 ENTERTAIN 3 0 MOVIE 4 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 7 A SPEAKERS B 9 8 NIGHT +10 ENT. CHP/INDEX 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 SEARCH MODE Switches between the All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes. (For details, see “XM Satellite Radio search modes” on page 49) 2 XM Switches the reception band between AM, FM and XM. 3 CATEGORY (All Channel Search mode) Changes the channel category to next one (while staying in the All Channel Search mode). (Category Search mode) Changes the channel category to next one. (Preset Search mode) Switches between five preset groups (A to E). 4 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (All Channel Search mode) Searches a radio channel within all channels. Press and hold for quick search. (Category Search mode) Searches a radio channel within the selected category. Press and hold for quick search. (Preset Search mode) Changes the preset number (1 to 8). 5 MEMORY Switches the unit to the preset memory mode. 6 DISPLAY Switches XM information such as channel number/name, category, or artist name/song title displayed in the front panel display and on-screen display. (For details, see “Switching XM information in the front panel display” on page 48). 46 6 DISPLAY MEMORY STEREO CATEGORY PRESET/CH TITLE BAND TV INPUT 7 1 BAND Switches the reception band between the currently selected band (AM or FM) and XM. 2 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i (All Channel Search mode) Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the channel category. Press PRESET/CH u / d to search a radio channel within all channels. Press and hold for quick search. (Category Search mode) Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the channel category. Press PRESET/CH u / d to search a radio channel within the selected category. Press and hold for quick search. (Preset Search mode) Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the preset group (A to E). Press PRESET/CH u / d to change the preset number (1 to 8). 3 MEMORY Switches the unit to the preset memory mode. 4 Numeric buttons (All Channel Search or Category Search mode) Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly. (Preset Search mode) Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly. 5 SRCH MODE Switches between the All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes. (For details, see “XM Satellite Radio search modes” on page 49) 6 DISPLAY Switches XM information such as channel number/name, category, or artist name/song title displayed in the front panel display and on-screen display. (For details, see “Switching XM information in the front panel display” on page 48). 7 ENT. Confirms an entered channel number during the Direct Number Access mode (see page 51). XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING Activating XM Satellite Radio 3 To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required. Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and then access the website at “http://activate.xmradio.com” or call “1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)” with a major credit card for signing up. Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) to select channel “0”. PRESET/CH TV VOL l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL or CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL VOLUME Front panel OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT SEARCH MODE XIM SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L MONO CATEGORY Remote control DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM LEVEL INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA Note You cannot select channel “0” if the All Channel Search mode (see page 49) is not selected. 1 4 Rotate INPUT (or press TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number displayed in the front panel display and write it down. ID:_____________________________________ INPUT TUNER or Remote control Front panel 2 Press XM (or BAND on the remote control) to select “XM” as the reception band. FM/AM LEVEL or TITLE XM BAND Front panel Remote control DVR/VCR2 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A XM XM RADIO Lights If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display, the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory may not be connected to the XM jack on the rear of this unit properly. See “XM Satellite Radio connections” on page 45 and check the connection. 47 BASIC OPERATION 1 2 XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Switching XM information in the front panel display Basic XM Satellite Radio operations ■ Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h NEXT SPEAKERS A MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM STRAIGHT You can display XM information (such as channel number/name, category, or artist name/song title) for the channel currently selected in the front panel display. Press DISPLAY on the unit (or remote control during the TUNER mode) repeatedly to toggle between the following channel information display modes. INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE B DISPLAY Channel name/number Front panel or Channel category ON SCREEN DISPLAY 2 1 Artist name/Song title Remote control 1 Rotate INPUT (or press TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. When the channel number/name is displayed: DVR/VCR2 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A INPUT XM [040] Deep Tra TUNER or When the channel category is displayed: DVR/VCR2 Remote control Front panel VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A XM <CAT>Rock 2 Press XM (or BAND on the remote control) to select “XM” as the reception band. Information (such as channel number/name, category, or artist name/song title) for the channel currently selected appears in the front panel display and the XM indicator lights up. FM/AM LEVEL or TITLE XM BAND Front panel Remote control When the artist name/song title is displayed: DVR/VCR2 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A XM Coldplay / Clo y • The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric characters at once. If the information contains more than 14 characters, the information scrolls from right to left. • If the information contains a character that cannot be recognized by the unit, the character will be displayed with an underbar “_”. Note DVR/VCR2 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A XM [001] Preview Lights y • Selecting the “XM” band automatically recalls the channel previously selected. • You can change the kind of XM information by pressing DISPLAY repeatedly. (For details, see “Switching XM information in the front panel display” on page 48). Note XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output from the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. 48 If a status message or an error message appears in the display, see “Status and error messages” on page 54. XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Displaying XM information in the onscreen display You can display XM information on a video monitor by pressing DISPLAY. It is much easier to see the available information than reading it on the front panel display. XM INFORMATION You can search for the channel you want to listen to using one of three search modes. You can also enter the number directly to select the desired channel (For details, see “Direct Number Access mode” on page 51). ■ All Channel Search mode p p ALL CH SEARCH XM:040 CHAN:Deep Tracks CAT:Rock NAME:Coldplay TITLE:Clocks .(Coldplay/Clo) []/[]:CHANNEL [<]/[>]:CATEGORY XM Satellite Radio search modes PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h NEXT SPEAKERS A MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM STRAIGHT INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE B y 2 3 1 Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode” on page 48. 2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”. SET MENU PRESET/TUNING EDIT or MENU SRCH MODE SEARCH MODE Front panel DVR/VCR2 VCR Remote control V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A XM ALL CH SEARCH 49 BASIC OPERATION • In the SET MENU (see page 73), you can set the time for displaying XM information in the on-screen display. • When “XM DISPLAY” in the SET MENU is set to “OFF”, you cannot display XM information in the on-screen display. • If the information contains a character that cannot be recognized by the unit (on-screen display program), the character will be displayed with an underbar “_”. XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Category Search mode 3 To change the channel category, press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly. PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h NEXT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PRESET/CH PROGRAM TV VOL SPEAKERS A STRAIGHT INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE B A/B/C/D/E or NEXT CH CATEGORY TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL Front panel 2 To search a channel within all channels, press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) repeatedly. 1 Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode” on page 48. 2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”. PRESET/CH TV VOL PRESET/TUNING EDIT l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL or CH TV MUTE ENTER CH SET MENU or MENU SRCH MODE SEARCH MODE Front panel TV VOL Front panel 3 Remote control Remote control Remote control DVR/VCR2 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL MD/CD-R DVD TUNER CD TUNED SP A y You can search a channel with the quick search by pressing and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control). XM CAT SEARCH 3 To change the channel category, press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly. PRESET/CH TV VOL A/B/C/D/E or NEXT CH CATEGORY TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL Front panel Remote control To search a channel within the selected channel category, press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) repeatedly. PRESET/CH TV VOL l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL or CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL Front panel Remote control y You can search a channel with the quick search by pressing and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control). 50 XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Preset Search mode ■ Direct Number Access mode Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you should preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For details, see “Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels” on page 52. All preset channels (A1 to E8) recalls “001 Preview” by the factory setting. TV AV REC AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MUTE 2 MENU TV VOL SRCH MODE BAND TV INPUT A-E/CAT. PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h NEXT SEARCH MODE MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO CATEGORY XM CH CH TV MUTE ENTER LEVEL DISPLAY PROGRAM ON SCREEN INPUT STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN SPEAKERS A STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE DISPLAY MEMORY B 3 EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 1 2 9 3 NIGHT 0 +10 SET MENU or MENU SRCH MODE SEARCH MODE Front panel Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode” on page 48. 2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”. PRESET/TUNING EDIT Remote control V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER 4 1 SET MENU or MENU SRCH MODE SEARCH MODE Front panel VCR ENT. Remote control CD TUNED SP A XM PRESET SEARCH DVR/VCR2 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A 3 To change the preset group (A to E), press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly. PRESET/CH XM ALL CH SEARCH or DVR/VCR2 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A TV VOL CAT SEARCH A/B/C/D/E or NEXT XM CH CH TV MUTE ENTER CATEGORY TV VOL Front panel Remote control To change the preset number (1 to 8), press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) repeatedly. PRESET/CH TV VOL l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL or CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL Front panel Remote control y You can also select the preset number directly by pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control. 51 BASIC OPERATION Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”. DVR/VCR2 8 CHP/INDEX Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode” on page 48. PRESET/TUNING EDIT 4 7 A SPEAKERS B 2 MOVIE EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING 3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the desired channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the numeric buttons as shown below. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite Radio channels (eight preset numbers in five preset groups, A1 to E8). You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset group and number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page 51. The display changes as follows. DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM <XM> --1 VCR1 V-AUX FM/AM SEARCH MODE XM A/B/C/D/E DTV/CBL DVD SP A SPEAKERS MD/CD-R TUNER V-AUX DTV/CBL DISPLAY STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM 2,5 4 3 <XM>123 Search the XM Satellite Radio channel you want to set as a preset channel. To search the desired channel, carry out “All Channel Search mode” or “Category Search mode” on page 46, or “Direct Number Access mode” on page 51. DVR/VCR2 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL MD/CD-R DVD TUNER CD TUNED If you enter fewer than three numbers you may press ENT. to tune to the channel immediately or wait a few seconds to confirm the entered channel number. ENT. y • If no button is pressed within a few seconds after entering onedigit or two-digit number, the unit automatically confirms the entered channel number. • Pressing a button other than numeric buttons or ENT. cancels the direct number access procedure. SP A XM [040] Deep Tra When the channel number “040” is selected 2 Press MEMORY on the unit (or remote control during the TUNER mode). The MEMORY indicator flashes for about five seconds. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM or RETURN MEMORY Remote control Front panel MEMORY Flashes 52 AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT CD TUNED SP A 4 TUNING MODE XM 1 VCR MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM LEVEL B <XM> -12 DVR/VCR2 l PRESET/TUNING/CH h CATEGORY PROGRAM A DVR/VCR2 PRESET/TUNING EDIT NEXT SP A XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING 3 While the MEMORY indicator is flashing, press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) to select a preset group (A to E). The group letter appears. PRESET/CH TV VOL A/B/C/D/E or NEXT CH CH TV MUTE ENTER CATEGORY TV VOL Front panel DVR/VCR2 Remote control VCR DTV/CBL V-AUX MD/CD-R DVD TUNER CD TUNED SP A C MEMORY XM [040] Deep Preset group 4 BASIC OPERATION While the MEMORY indicator is flashing, press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) to select a preset number (1 to 8). PRESET/CH TV VOL l PRESET/TUNING/CH h or LEVEL CH CH TV MUTE ENTER TV VOL Remote control Front panel DVR/VCR2 VCR DTV/CBL V-AUX MD/CD-R DVD TUNER TUNED SP A CD MEMORY XM C5 [040] Deep Preset number 5 While the MEMORY indicator is flashing, press MEMORY on the unit (or the remote control) to preset the selected XM Satellite Radio channel. A colon appears next to the preset number for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns off. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM or RETURN MEMORY Remote control Front panel DVR/VCR2 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A XM C5:[040] Deep Colon appears Note Presetting a new channel clears the former preset channel stored in the same preset group and number. 53 XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Status and error messages If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. Message Cause Remedy CHECK ANTENNA The XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory is not connected, or does not work properly. • Check the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory connections. UPDATING The XM user encryption code is being updated. • Wait until the encryption code is updated. NO SIGNAL The signal is too weak. • Check the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory connections and orient it for the best reception. LOADING It takes longer than four seconds for audio or text data to be decoded. • Wait until the decoding process has finished. OFF AIR The XM Satellite Radio channel you selected is not currently broadcasting any signal. • Check the channel number again or select another XM Satellite Radio channel. <XM> - - - The channel station ID (SID) is no longer available. - - - No artist name/feature or song/program title is available. / - - - <CAT> - - - 54 No channels are available for the selected category. • Select another channel category by pressing CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly. RECORDING RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT SPEAKERS A B MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES INPUT STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA (U.S.A. model) 1 2 TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM 1 POWER STANDBY INPUT MODE MULTI CH IN A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 2 SELECT 1 Turn on the power of this unit and all connected components. 2 Select the source component you want to record from. INPUT A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD or Front panel Remote control 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. 55 BASIC OPERATION SLEEP Notes • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, “SPEAKER LEVEL” (page 66) and programs does not affect recorded material. • A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal to your VCR. • Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input to the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are not output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital (or analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters. y The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to AUTO (see page 37) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. Notes • This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the actual hall, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself. For movie/video sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI” can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel (stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.1 Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on page 32 to 36. Remote control button Program Features 1 STEREO: 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel (left and right) or plays back 2-channel sources as is. 2 MUSIC: POP/ROCK This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. Sources ENTERTAINMENT: Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching TV Sports various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. 3 ENTERTAINMENT: This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence Mono Movie sound field. ENTERTAINMENT: This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. Game MOVIE THEATER: CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and Spectacle the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). MOVIE THEATER: CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic Sci-Fi 4 space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER: CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be Adventure similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER: CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. General 56 MULTI 2-CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Remote control button Program Features SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for the selected decoder. SUR. ENHANCED Enhanced processing for the selected decoder. 5 Sources MULTI 2-CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS 57 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS For music sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc. Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on page 32 to 36. Remote control button Program Features STEREO: 2ch Stereo 2-channel (left and right) playback. STEREO: 7ch Stereo Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. MUSIC: Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. MUSIC: The Bttm Line HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. MUSIC: The Roxy Thtr HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. ENTERTAINMENT: Disco HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by high-energy, “immediate” sound. SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for the selected decoder. SUR. ENHANCED Enhanced processing for the selected decoder. 2-CH 1 2 3 5 58 Sources MULTI 2-CH MULTI 2-CH ADVANCED OPERATIONS ADVANCED OPERATIONS Selecting the OSD mode Using the sleep timer You can display this unit’s operating information on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is by reading this information on the front panel display. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to change the OSD mode. The OSD mode changes in the following order: full display, short display, and display off. Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to AC OUTLET(S). ■ Setting the sleep timer TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 2 ON SCREEN DISPLAY SELECT Full display Always shows the sound field program parameter settings as well as the contents of the front panel display. POWER POWER TV AV AMP Short display Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit. 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. Display off Only operations performed using ON SCREEN are displayed. The OSD is displayed when using SET MENU, even if the OSD mode is set to “Display off”. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. P04 MOVIE THEATER SLEEP 120min P04MOVIETHEATER General Full display Short display SLEEP OFF DVR/VCR2 SLEEP 90min SLEEP 30min VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD SLEEP 60min MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A HiFi DSP PHONO VOLUME SLEEP dB L R Notes • The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will not be recorded. • You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when a video source is not being reproduced (or the source component is turned off) by using “DISPLAY SET” (see page 71). • When using component video signals, the “Short display” is not output to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. To display the OSD with component video signal input, set the OSD mode to “Full Display” while GRAY BACK in DISPLAY SET (see page 71) is set to AUTO. The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. SLEEP indicator DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A TV Sports PHONO VOLUME SLEEP dB L R 59 ADVANCED OPERATION .General DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;15ms P.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;20ms S.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 SLEEP ADVANCED OPERATIONS ■ Canceling the sleep timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the SLEEP indicator goes off. SLEEP SLEEP OFF Manually adjusting speaker levels You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Please note that this operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 24), “SPEAKER LEVEL” (page 66). y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) to set this unit to the standby mode. POWER POWER TV AV AMP 1 REC AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL 2 LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MUTE MENU TV VOL SRCH MODE BAND TV INPUT A-E/CAT. CH TV MUTE ENTER CH ON SCREEN 4 STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN MEMORY DISPLAY EFFECT 3 1 Press AMP. 2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. FRONT L CENTER FRONT R SUR.R SUR.L SUR.B.R SUR.B.L SWFR PRES.L PRES.R Front left speaker level Center speaker level Front right speaker level Surround right speaker level Surround left speaker level Surround back right speaker level Surround back left speaker level Subwoofer level Presence left speaker level Presence right speaker level y Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by pressing u / d. 3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB. 4 Press ENTER when you have completed your adjustment. y This operation can also be performed using the controls on the front panel. Press NEXT repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust, then press LEVEL –/+ to adjust the output level. 60 SET MENU SET MENU You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ AUTO SETUP Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 24). ■ MANUAL SETUP Use to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. 1 SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust any speaker setting, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. y Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 24). You can use SOUND MENU to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first. Item Features Page A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over frequency. 64 B)SPEAKER LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 66 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 67 D)EQUALIZER Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 67 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 68 F)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 68 G)AUDIO SET Customizes the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings. 68 2 INPUT MENU Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode or rename your inputs. Item Features Page 69 B)INPUT MODE Selects the initial input mode of the source. 70 C)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the inputs. 70 D)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 70 ADVANCED OPERATION A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 61 SET MENU 3 OPTION MENU Use to adjust the optional system parameters. Item Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. 71 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings. 71 C)PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 72 D)MULTI ZONE SET Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals or selects how the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified. 72 E)XM RADIO SET Displays the current reception level for the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory. 72 ■ SIGNAL INFO Use to check audio Signal information (see page 37). 62 SET MENU Using SET MENU 4 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. Press ENTER to enter MANUAL SETUP. 1 SOUND MENU appears on the front panel display. ;MANUAL SETUP PRESET/CH TV VOL POWER POWER TV 1 AMP AV CH REC TV MUTE ENTER .1SOUNDMENU 2INPUTMENU 3OPTIONMENU CH AUDIO VOL p p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter DISC SKIP TV VOL LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MUTE 2,8 MENU TV VOL SRCH MODE BAND TV INPUT 3-7 A-E/CAT. CH TV MUTE ENTER CH ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 7 A SPEAKERS B 9 0 8 NIGHT 10 5 Press u / d to select the desired menu. 6 Press ENTER to enter the selected menu. ENT. CHP/INDEX 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 PRESET/CH TV VOL y You cannot change some SET MENU parameters while the unit is in either cinema or music night listening mode. 1 TV MUTE ENTER CH p Note CH p • You can change SET MENU parameters while the unit is reproducing sound. • If you press a sound field program button during SET MENU operation, the SET MENU is canceled. .A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)EQUALIZER []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter TV VOL 7 Press u / d and ENTER to select the submenu, then press u / d to select the item and j / i to change the parameter. Press AMP. B)SPEAKER LEVEL AMP -+ .FL FR C 2 Press SET MENU. SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE Press u / d to select MANUAL SETUP. PRESET/CH SET MENU TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER ADVANCED OPERATION 3 • Repeat this operation to select and adjust each setting. • To return to the previous menu level, press RETURN. CH ;AUTOSETUP .;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO. 8 To exit, press SET MENU when finished. SET MENU p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p TV VOL MENU SRCH MODE Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. 63 SET MENU 1 SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 24). 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 p p .A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)EQUALIZER []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET Use to manually adjust any speaker setting. y If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: LARGE, SMALL Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: LRG, SML, NONE CENTER SP NONE)SMLLRG • Select LRG if you have a large center speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal to the center speaker. • Select SML if you have a small center speaker. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center channel to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front left and right speakers. Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP Choices: LRG, SML, NONE SUR. L/R SP FRONT SP NONE)SMLLRG SMALL)LARGE • Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front channel to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the front left and right channel signals to the front left and right speakers. 64 • Select LRG if you have large surround left and right speakers. The entire range of the surround channel signal is directed to the surround left and right speakers. • Select SML if you have small surround left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround channel are directed to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers. This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 36) and automatically set the surround back speaker setting (SUR. B L/R SP) to NONE. SET MENU Surround back speakers SUR. B L/R SP Choices: LRGx1, LRGx2, SMLx2, SMLx1, NONE SUR. B L/R SP Bass out LFE/BASS OUT Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers according to the characteristics of your system. This setting also determines the routing of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources. Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH SMLx1)SMLx2 • Select LRGx1 if you have a large surround back speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the left surround back speaker. • Select LRGx2 if you have 2 large surround back speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the surround back speakers. • Select SMLx2 if you have 2 small surround back speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channels are directed to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select SMLx1 if you have a small surround back speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”, and the rest of the frequency signals are directed to the left surround back speaker. • Select NONE if you do not have a surround back speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back channel signal to the surround left and right speakers. Note If you select SMLx1 or LRGx1, connect the speaker to the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. Presence speakers Choices: YES, NONE PRESENCE SP LFE/BASS OUT SWFRFRNT)BOTH • Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. • Select FRNT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and low frequency signals from other channels are directed to the front speakers according to the speaker settings (even if you have previously set front speakers to SML). • Select BOTH if you connect a subwoofer and you want to output low-frequency signals from front channels to both the front speakers and subwoofer. LFE and lowfrequency signals from other channels are also directed to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. Use this function to reinforce low-frequency signals using the subwoofer when playing back sources such as CDs. PRESENCE SP CROSS OVER )NONEYES FREQ;;;80Hz • Select YES if you have presence speakers. • Select NONE if you do not have presence speakers. y When YES is selected, the unit automatically adjusts the dialog lift parameter. To adjust it manually, see page 92. 65 ADVANCED OPERATION Cross over CROSS OVER Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer. Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz SET MENU Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer. Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE ■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use these settings to manually balance the speaker level of each speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 64). Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Initial Setting: 0 dB 02ASUBWOOFER PHASE B)SPEAKER LEVEL -+ .FL FR C )NORMALREVERSE • Select NORMAL if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select REVERSE to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. Presence/Surround back channel priority PRIORITY You can select to prioritize either the surround back or presence speakers when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field programs. Choices: PRch, SBch PRIORITY p p PRch )SBch • Select PRch to use presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channel will be output from surround speakers. • Select SBch to use surround back speakers when a surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output from front speakers. 66 • • • • • • • • • • * FL adjusts the balance of the front left speaker. FR adjusts the balance of the front right speaker. C adjusts the balance of the center speaker. SL adjusts the balance of the surround left speaker. SR adjusts the balance of the surround right speaker. SBL* adjusts the balance of the surround back left speaker. SBR* adjusts the balance of the surround back right speaker. SWFR adjusts the balance of the subwoofer. PL adjusts the balance of the presence left speaker. PR adjusts the balance of the presence right speaker. Instead of SBL and SBR, SB will be displayed if you selected only one surround back speaker in SUR. B L/R SP (page 65). SET MENU ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually input the distance of each speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time. C)SP DISTANCE p p . UNIT;;;;;;meters FRONTL;;;;3.00m FRONTR;;;;3.00m CENTER;;;;;3.00m []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: U.S.A. and Canada models: feet (ft) Other models: meters (m) • Select meters to input speaker distances in meters. • Select feet to input speaker distances in feet. Center graphic equalizer CENTER GEQ When CNTR GEQ is selected, use this feature to output a test tone and adjust the tonal quality so that it matches that of the front left speaker. You can adjust 5 frequency bands: 100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz, 10kHz Choices: –6 to +6 dB Initial setting: 0 dB D)EQUALIZER .TEST)OFFON -+ 100Hz0dB 300Hz0dB 1kHz0dB 3kHz0dB 10kHz0dB []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust p • Select ON to output test tones from the front left and center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the center speaker. • Select OFF to stop the test tone and output the currently selected source component. • Press u / d to select a frequency band. • Press j / i to adjust the selected frequency band. ADVANCED OPERATION * Equalizer EQ TYPE SELECT Select to change the type of equalizer used by this unit. Choices: AUTO PEQ, CNTR GEQ, EQ OFF • Select AUTO PEQ to use the equalizer adjusted in auto setup. • Select CNTR GEQ to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic equalizer so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front left and right speakers. • Select EQ OFF to cancel equalizing. p Speaker distances Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft) • FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SUR. L adjusts the distance of the surround left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SUR. R adjusts the distance of the surround right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SB L* adjusts the distance of the surround back left speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) • SB R* adjusts the distance of the surround back right speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) • SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • PRES L adjusts the distance of the presence left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • PRES R adjusts the distance of the presence right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) ■ Center graphic equalizer D)EQUALIZER Use this feature to select the parametric (AUTO PEQ) or graphic equalizer (CNTR GEQ). Instead of SB L and SB R, SUR. B will be displayed if you selected only one surround back speaker in SUR. B L/R SP (page 65). 67 SET MENU ■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET Use to customize this units overall audio settings. G)AUDIO SET .MUTING TYPE;;FULL AUDIODELAY;;0ms TONE BYPASS;;AUTO p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries lowfrequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Choices: –20 to 0 dB E)LFE LEVEL .SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Speaker SPEAKER Select to adjust the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Select to adjust the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of “LFE LEVEL”, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. ■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard), MAX (maximum) F)DYNAMIC RANGE .SP:MINSTD)MAX HP:MINSTD)MAX p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Speaker SP Select to adjust the speaker compression. Headphone HP Select to adjust the headphone compression. • Select MIN if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select STD for general use. • Select MAX to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. 68 Muting type MUTING TYPE Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume. Choices: FULL, –20dB • Select FULL to completely halt all output of sound. • Select –20dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay AUDIO DELAY Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Choices: 0 to 160 ms Tone bypass TONE BYPASS Use to select whether audio output bypasses tone control circuitry when TREBLE and BASS are set to 0 dB (see page 31). Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select AUTO if you want signals to bypass tone control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible. • Select OFF if you do not want signals to bypass tone control circuitry. SET MENU For OPTICAL INPUT jack 2 (OPTICAL IN (2)), 3 (OPTICAL IN (3)) and 4 (OPTICAL IN (4)) 2 INPUT MENU Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode or rename your inputs. 2 INPUTMENU p p .A)I/OASSIGNMENT B)INPUTMODE C)INPUTRENAME D)VOLUME TRIM []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Choices: (2) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, VCR1, DVR/VCR2 (3) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, VCR1, DVR/VCR2 (4) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, VCR1, DVR/VCR2 OPTICALIN .(2);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R) (3);;;;; DVD (DVD ) (4);;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL ) ■ Input/output assignment A)I/O ASSIGNMENT You can assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using INPUT on the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control. For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 5 (COAXIAL IN (5)) and 6 (COAXIAL IN (6)) Choices: (5) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2 (6) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2 For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A (CMPNT-V INPUT [A]) and B (CMPNT-V INPUT [B]) Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2 [B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2 CMPNT-VINPUT .[A];;;;;DVD (DVD) [B];;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL) COAXIALIN .(5);;;;; CD ( CD ) (6);;;;; DVD (DVD ) Notes For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 (OPTICAL OUT (1)) Choices: PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2 OPTICALOUT .(1);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R ) 69 ADVANCED OPERATION • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. SET MENU ■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE ■ Volume Trim D) VOLUME TRIM Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 37 for details about the input mode). Choices: AUTO, LAST Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input to each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Choices: PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/ CBL, V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2 B)INPUTMODE )AUTOLAST [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select AUTO to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. • Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. Note Even if LAST is selected, the last setting for the EX/ES button will not be recalled. ■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the inputs on the OSD and front panel display. C)INPUTRENAME DVD->DVD p p [<]/[>]:Position []/[]:Chara. 1 Press an input selector button to select the input you want to change the name of. 2 Press AMP. 3 Press j / i to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or the character you want to edit. 4 Press u / d to select the character you want, then use j / i to move to the next space. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press d to change the character in the following order, or press u to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#, *, -, +, etc.) 5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 to rename each input. 6 To exit, press SET MENU when finished. 70 SET MENU 3 OPTION MENU Use to adjust the optional system parameters. 3 OPTIONMENU p p .A)DISPLAYSET B)MEMORYGUARD C)PARAM.INI D)MULTI ZONESET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET A)DISPLAYSET p p .DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0 VIDEOCONV.;;;ON OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0 GRAYBACK;;;AUTO CMPNTOSD;;;;;ON []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:sELECT Dimmer DIMMER Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Choices: –4 to 0 Notes • Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video connections (i.e., S-video) between each component. • When converting composite video or S-video signals from a VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. Notes • When only the component video signals are input, the OSD is not displayed if GRAY BACK is set to OFF. To display the OSD with component video signal input, set GRAY BACK to AUTO while the OSD mode (see page 59) is set to “Full Display”. • When video signals are not being input, set GRAY BACK to AUTO to display the OSD. Component OSD CMPNT OSD Use this feature to turn on/off OSD output to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks when using the SET MENU. Choices: ON, OFF • Select ON to output the OSD signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • Select OFF if you do not want to output the OSD signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. Note SET MENU functions even when OFF is selected. ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON B)MEMORYGUARD )OFFON [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return ADVANCED OPERATION Video conversion VIDEO CONV. Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite (VIDEO) signals to both S-video and component signals. This allows you to output converted video signals from the S VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks when no S-video or component signals are input. This feature also converts S-video signals to component signals when no component signals are input. Choices: ON, OFF • Select OFF not to convert any signals. (except S-video signals to composite signals) • Select ON to convert composite signals to S-video and component signals, and to convert S-video signals to component signals. • Regardless of the setting, S-video signals are always converted to composite signals. Gray back GRAY BACK Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays a gray background when there’s no video signal input. Nothing is displayed if OFF is selected. Choices: AUTO, OFF Select ON to protect: • DSP program parameters • All SET MENU items • All speaker levels • The on-screen display (OSD) mode Note When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items. OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward) • Press + to lower the position of the OSD. • Press – to raise the position of the OSD. 71 SET MENU ■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound field program that you want to initialize. Choices: An asterisk (*) appears next to program numbers that have been changed from their initial settings. Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE, STANDAND Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit when “SP B” is set to ZONE B, the sound is output from both headphones and SPEAKERS B. • If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to ZONE B, the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP (U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models only) Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified. Choices: INT, EXT D)MULTI ZONESET .SPB;;;;;;;;FRONT ZONE2 AMP;;;;;EXT C)PARAM.INI STEREO *MUSIC ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE THEATER *STANDARD Press DSP Key Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any program groups when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON. ■ Zone set D) MULTI ZONE SET Use to specify the location of speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. D)MULTI ZONESET .SPB;;;;;;;;FRONT ZONE2 AMP;;;;;EXT [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return Speaker B setting SP B Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B • Select FRONT to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main room. • Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound from SPEAKERS B only. [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select EXT if you do not use Zone 2 speakers or if you connect your Zone 2 speakers through an external amplifiers connected to this unit’s ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. • Select INT to use this unit’s internal amplifier if you connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals. ■ XM Radio setting E)XM RADIO SET XM information display time XM DISPLAY Use to set the time for displaying XM information in the on-screen display. If “10s” or “30s” is selected, xm information is displayed for 10 or 30 seconds after pressing DISPLAY. Choices: OFF, 10s, 30s, ON y When “XM DISPLAY” in the SET MENU is set to “ON”, pressing DISPLAY shows xm information until you select another input source (see page 30). XM Radio antenna XM ANT. Use to check the current reception level for the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory connected to this unit. For the best reception, orient the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory so that a value of XX% or more is displayed here. Range: NONE, 0 to 100% Note “NONE” is displayed if the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory is not connected to this unit. If this happens, check the antenna connections (see page 45). E)XM RADIO SET XM DISPLAY;;;10S XM ANTENNA;;;75% [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return 72 ADVANCED SETUP MENU ADVANCED SETUP MENU The ADVANCED SETUP menu is displayed in the front panel display. 3 y • During the advanced setup procedure, audio output is muted. • During the advanced setup procedure, only the STANDBY/ON, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) buttons, and PROGRAM selector on the front panel are available for operation. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) repeatedly to toggle between the available parameters. STRAIGHT EFFECT CAUTION Be sure to set the speaker impedance before using this unit to play back audio or video signals. 4 Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection. (U.S.A. model) STANDBY /ON VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM A/B/C/D/E NEXT l PRESET/TUNING/CH h SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 1,3 2 1,4 1 This completes the advanced setup procedure. The settings you made are reflected the next time this unit’s power is turned on. Turn off the power to this unit, and while holding down STRAIGHT (EFFECT), press STANDBY/ON. This unit turns on, and the ADVANCED SETUP menu appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT STANDBY /ON ADVANCED OPERATION While holding down, press EFFECT 2 Rotate PROGRAM to move through the menu and select the item you want to set up. See the end of this section for a complete list of available parameters. PROGRAM 73 ADVANCED SETUP MENU ■ ADVANCED SETUP menu items Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Speaker impedance SP IMP. Use to switch the speaker impedance for this unit. Choices: 8 Ω MIN, 4 Ω MIN • Select 8 Ω MIN to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω. • Select 4 Ω MIN to set the speaker impedance to 4 Ω. SP IMP. Speaker Front Impedance level If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. 4 Ω ΜΙΝ Center Surround Surround back The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Front 8 Ω ΜΙΝ Center Surround Surround back • If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.* The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems (A and B) simultaneously when SP IMP is set to the 8 Ω MIN position. Factory presets PRESET Use to reset all parameters to the factory presets (see page 98). Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select CANCEL if you do not want this unit’s parameters to be initialized when you reset the factory presets. • Select RESET if you want all of this unit’s parameters to be initialized when you reset the factory presets. Note This setting does not affect ADVANCED SETUP menu item parameters. Remote REMOTE Use to switch the ID for the remote control of this unit. Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select ID1 to operate this unit using the default code. • Select ID2 to operate this unit using an alternative code. 74 Note You must also make settings for the remote control (see page 76). < Asia and General models only > Tuner TU Use to switch the frequency step selection according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50 • North, Central and South America: AM10/FM100 (kHz) • Other areas: AM9/FM50 (kHz) REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up remote control with the appropriate remote control codes. This remote control also has a learn feature which allows the remote to acquire functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter. Control area ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling other components The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit after pressing AMP to activate the AMP mode. The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected component. Select the component you want to control by pressing an input selector button or SELECT k/n. The name of the selected component appears in the display window. TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT Press AMP to control this unit. POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO The buttons in the dotted lines control this unit in any mode (SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY, SLEEP, INPUT MODE, MULTI CH IN, VOLUME +/–, MUTE, STRAIGHT and input selector buttons) function in any mode. DISC SKIP VOL LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MUTE MENU TV VOL BAND TV INPUT SRCH MODE CH CH A-E/CAT. TV MUTE ENTER The A/B and input selector buttons switch the function of the component control area below. * Use the A/B buttons to control other components regardless of whether they are connected to this unit. Factory setting: A...LD player B...CD recorder SELECT k/n switches control to another component without changing the input source on this unit. TRANSMIT RE-NAME STANDBY POWER B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT POWER STRAIGHT POWER STEREO 1 2 SELECT 5 6 ENTERTAIN MOVIE 3 4 A SPEAKERS B VOLAUDIO DISC SKIP 8 NIGHT 10 LEVEL ENT. Component control area You can control up to 11 different components by setting appropriate remote control codes (see page 76). Fixing the remote to AMP mode You can fix the remote permanently to AMP mode (fixed AMP mode) so that the shaded areas above always control this unit. This is useful, if you primarily want to use the remote control in AMP mode. To fix AMP mode, hold down AMP for at least 3 seconds so that “A:___” appears in the display window. PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MUTE MENU TV VOL SRCH MODE LEVEL PRESET/CH BAND TV INPUT TITLE CH TV MUTE BAND ENTER TV INPUT CH TV VOL RETURN MEMORY STEREO 1 STANDARD A:DVD REC ADVANCED OPERATION 0 DISC SKIP CHP/INDEX Fixed AMP mode AV AUDIO EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 7 POWER TV EFFECT STANDARD 9 REC DISPLAY MUSIC AMP AV POWER TV VOL RETURN MEMORY LEARN INPUT MODE SYSTEM A TV ON SCREEN CLEAR SLEEP 5 MENU SRCH MODE CH TV MUTESTRAIGHT ON SCREEN ENTER DISPLAY EFFECT ON SCREEN TV VOL MOVIE MUSIC ENTERTAIN RETURN DISPLAY 2 MEMORY 3 4 STEREO MUSICPUREENTERTAIN SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT 6 1 A SPEAKERS STANDARD B 9 SET MENU A-E/CAT. CHTV VOL 0 5 7 2 8 3 MOVIE 4 SELECT NIGHT EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 10 6 ENTER 7 8 CHP/INDEX A SPEAKERS B 9 0 NIGHT 10 ENT. CHP/INDEX DVD Component control mode To temporarily switch to component control mode, press AMP. To cancel fixed AMP mode, hold down AMP for at least 3 seconds. 75 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting remote control codes 2 You can control other components by setting the appropriate manufacturer codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. The following table shows the factory preset component (Library: component category) and the manufacturer code for each area. LEARN Remote Control Code Default Settings Component category (Library) Input area Manufacturer A LD B CD-R PHONO TV – V-AUX VCR – TUNER TUNER MD/CD-R MD Yamaha-1 CD CD Yamaha-1 DTV/CBL TV – VCR – DVR Yamaha DVD DVD Yamaha-1 Note You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is initially set as listed above. In this case, try to set other YAMAHA remote control code(s). Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to set up. PHONO MULTI CH IN B V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. Yamaha-3 (U.K. and Europe models) Yamaha-4 (Other models) VCR 1 A y Yamaha DVR/VCR2 1 Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. Yamaha (U.K. and Europe models) Yamaha-1 (Other models) If you want to change a library (component category), press j / i. You can set a different type of component. Library choices: L:DVD, L:DVR, L:LD, L:CD, L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN, L:AMP*, L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:DBS, L:SAT, L:VCR • The amplifier Library (L:AMP) code is preset to “ID1” to operate this unit. However, you can switch between the following two codes if necessary. The initial setting for “Amplifier library” is “ID1”. AMP library code (remote control setting) Function Remote control ID (this unit’s setting: see page 74) ID1 To operate this unit using the (initial setting) default code. ID1Z To operate this unit using the default code. To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3 features (see page 83). (U.S.A., Canada, Europe and Australia models only) ID2 To operate this unit using an alternative code. ID2Z To operate this unit using an alternative code. To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3 features (see page 83). (U.S.A., Canada, Europe and Australia models only) ID1 (initial setting) ID2 When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately 76 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 3 Press u / d to select the name of your component’s manufacturer. You will find the names of most worldwide audiovideo manufacturers in alphabetical order in the display window. 5 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN Notes PRESET/CH TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL 4 Press one of the buttons shaded below to see if you can control your component. If you can, the manufacturer code is correct. POWER POWER TV AV • The supplied remote control does not contain all possible manufacturer codes for commercially available AV components (including YAMAHA AV components). If operation is not possible with any of the manufacturer codes, program the new remote control function with the Learn feature (see below) or use the remote control supplied with the component. • If you have already programmed a remote control function for a button, the function by learning programming takes priority over the setup manufacturer code’s function. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button at the same time. AMP REC AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MUTE MENU TV VOL BAND TV INPUT SRCH MODE y • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one codes, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you continuously want to set up a code for another component, press TV MUTE/ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. ADVANCED OPERATION 77 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling other components Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you can use this remote to control your other components. Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Use the input selector buttons to select the component you want to operate. The remote control automatically switches to the appropriate control mode for that component. 1 2 3 POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL 4 5 6 LEVEL SET MENU MUTE SRCH MODE A-E/CAT. CH TV MUTE ENTER CH ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 9 0 7 8 NIGHT ENT. 10 CHP/INDEX 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A *1 0 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT A SPEAKERS B 1 2 3 9 MENU TV VOL BAND TV INPUT 7 8 PRESET/CH TITLE A DVD player/ VCR DVD recorder Digital TV/ Cable TV LD player CD player MD/CD recorder Tuner *4 AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 VCR power *3 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 TV POWER TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 REC/DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) Rec VCR rec *3 Disc skip Rec (MD) h Play Play VCR play *3 Play Play Play ll Search backward Search backward VCR search backward *3 Search backward Search backward Search backward hh Search forward Search forward VCR search forward *3 Search forward Search forward Search forward AUDIO Audio e Pause b Skip backward a Skip forward s Stop Stop VCR stop *3 TITLE/ TV INPUT Title TV input *2 TV MUTE/ ENTER Select TV mute *2 TV VOL + Up TV VOL – Down CH + Right VCR channel + CH – Left RETURN Return 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons MENU Menu DISPLAY Display ENT. Title/Index Sound Pause VCR pause *3 Pause Pause Pause Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Stop Stop Stop TV input TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 TV mute TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 Preset up (1 – 8) TV volume – *2 TV volume – TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 Preset down (1 – 8) TV channel + TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 Preset up (A – E) Band VCR channel – TV channel – TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 Preset down (A – E) Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8) Display Display Display Display Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button. These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV/CBL or PHONO. When the remote control code for your TV is set up in both the DTV/CBL and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/CBL area. *3 These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1. *4 The U.K. model is not equipped with the tuner reception function. *2 78 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Programming codes from other remote controls 3 If you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the remote control code, or an appropriate remote control code is not available, do the following. You can program any of the buttons available in the component control area (see page 75). The buttons can be programmed independently for each component. Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than three seconds, the remote enters the manufacturer code setting mode. LEARN Note This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operating instructions for the remote control of your component.) 1 Press an input selector button to select a source component. PHONO Flashes alternately y Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. B V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD MULTI CH IN INPUT MODE LEARN SLEEP CD CLEAR PHONO DVD RE-NAME STANDBY MD/CD-R TRANSMIT POWER B DVR/VCR2 SYSTEM A VCR 1 TUNER AMP SELECT V-AUX AUDIO Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. DTV/CBL REC DISC SKIP AV Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. POWER 5 VOL 2 POWER Press the button at which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” is displayed. TV 4 MULTI CH IN A LEARN INPUT MODE CLEAR SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN RE-NAME STANDBY PHONO TRANSMIT POWER B MD/CD-R SYSTEM A DVR/VCR2 DVD VCR 1 TUNER AMP SELECT V-AUX AV POWER DTV/CBL TV POWER ADVANCED OPERATION LEARN INPUT MODE CLEAR SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN RE-NAME STANDBY PHONO TRANSMIT POWER B MD/CD-R SYSTEM A DVR/VCR2 DVD VCR 1 TUNER AMP SELECT V-AUX AV POWER DTV/CBL TV POWER 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) 79 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Notes • “NG” appears in the display window if programming was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. • This remote control can learn approximately 120 functions. However depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 120 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning. 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program additional functions. 7 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning mode. Changing source names in the display window You can change the name that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use a different name to the one that is set as the factory preset. This is useful when you have set the input selector to control a different component. 1 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to rename. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD LEARN Notes • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. – When the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small. – When the remote control infrared windows are not facing at the appropriate angle. – When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. – When the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more than one button at the same time. 2 3 Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RE-NAME Press u / d to select and enter a character. Pressing d changes the character as follows: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, -(hyphen), and /(slash). (Pressing u changes the characters in reverse order.) PRESET/CH TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL 4 Press j / i to move the cursor to the next position. PRESET/CH TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL y If you want to continue setting up names for other components, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. 5 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the renaming mode. RE-NAME 80 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Clearing function sets You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, renamed source names and setup manufacturer codes. 4 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode. Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button reverts to the factory preset setting. CLEAR 1 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Note “ERROR” appears in the display window under the following circumstances: – When a button other than the cursor is pressed. – When more than one button is pressed at the same time. CLEAR y Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Other wise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press CLEAR again. 2 Press u / d to select the clear mode. L:DVD (L: name of a component) L:AMP L:ALL RNAME FCTRY 3 Clears all learned functions in the respective component control area. Press an input selector button to select the component. Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control area. Clears all learned functions. Clears all renamed source names. Clears all remote functions and returns the remote to the factory settings. Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. CLEAR ADVANCED OPERATION Note “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. 81 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Clearing individual functions 4 Repeat step 3 to clear other learned functions. 5 Press LEARN again to exit. ■ Clearing a learned function You can clear the function learned in a certain programmed button in each area. 1 2 Press an input selector button to select the source component containing the function you want to clear. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. LEARN y Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE MULTI CH IN A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD When you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory preset setting (or manufacturer setting if you have set manufacturer codes). 82 ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA, AUSTRALIA AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY) ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA, AUSTRALIA AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY) This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. You can control this unit from the second room using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second room. Any source you want to listen to in the second room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit. Zone 2 connections You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second room. • An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second room to the main room (to a CD player, for example). • An amplifier and speakers for the second room. y • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room installation, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE CONTROL OUT jack of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to 6 YAMAHA components can be connected as shown. OUT IN OUT IN REMOTE CONTROL OUT This unit • ■ System configuration and connections example ZONE 2 OUTPUT Amplifier This unit ADVANCED OPERATION DVD player (or other component) Remote control DVD INPUT Infrared emitter Main room REMOTE CONTROL OUT Infrared signal receiver Second room ZONE 2 REMOTE IN Notes • When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the volume control on the amplifier in the second room. • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 83 ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA, AUSTRALIA AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY) Using this unit’s internal amplifier To use this unit’s internal amplifier, set “ZONE2 AMP” to “INT” in SET MENU (see page 72). – + L R PRESENCE /ZONE 2 Second room This unit Remote controlling Zone 2 4 The supplied remote control can be used to control Zone 2. You can even select the input source and control components located in the main room directly from the second room regardless of the listening condition in the main room. Press LEARN to complete the Zone setup. The remote control will be able to operate this unit and Zone 2. LEARN ■ To control Zone 2 y You can also turn on/off the MAIN and ZONE 2 mode by pressing MAIN or ZONE 2 on the front panel. 1 ■ To enable Zone 2 mode on the remote control You will be able to switch the remote control mode from one room to another, and use STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOL –/+ to control the selected room. 1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 of the procedure in “Setting remote control codes” on page 76. 2 Press j / i to select “L:AMP”. Press SELECT k repeatedly to display “ZONE2” in the display window. SELECT PRESET/CH 2 TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL 3 Press u / d to select “ID1Z”. PRESET/CH TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL Notes • To select the Zone feature with ID2, select “ID2Z”. • Since the Zone 2 code is common to “ID1Z” and “ID2Z”, the Zone 2 code does not change even if the AMP library code (remote control setting) is switched. 84 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 power on. ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA, AUSTRALIA AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY) ■ Turning this unit to either on or standby 3 4 Press an input selector button to select the input source you want to listen to in the second room. The display window shows “2: name of selected input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2 mode. PHONO MULTI CH IN A B V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD You can control Zone 2 using the input selector, STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOL –/+. REC TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR AUDIO DISC SKIP STANDBY SLEEP LCD display SYSTEM POWER/ STANDBY Normal mode* Name of component Turns the main unit on/standby Zone 2 mode “ZONE2” or “2:name of component” Turns Zone 2 to on/ standby System mode “SYSTM” Turns everything (the main unit and Zone 2) on/standby * LEARN SYSTEM POWER SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY work differently depending on the selected mode that appears on the display window. • When normal, Zone 2 mode is selected, you can turn the main unit, Zone 2 to on/standby individually. • When system mode is selected, or when ID1/ID2 is selected as the amplifier library (L:AMP) code, you can turn the main unit, Zone 2 to on/standby all together simultaneously. INPUT MODE VOL A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD * LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MUTE “MAIN” appears for a few seconds when SYSTEM POWER or STANDBY is pressed. MENU TV VOL DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SRCH MODE BAND TV INPUT A-E/CAT. CH TV MUTE ENTER CH ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN MEMORY DISPLAY EFFECT * If “ZONE2 AMP” in OPTION MENU is set to INT, you can use VOL –/+ to adjust sound output from speakers connected to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals (see page 72). However, VOL –/+ cannot be used to adjust sound output from the ZONE2 OUTPUT jacks. 5 Press SELECT k/n to exit from the Zone 2 mode. Notes The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. If you attempt to send the DTS signal to the second room you will only hear digital noise (that may damage your speakers). Thus, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made when playing DTS-encoded discs. For DVDs encoded in DTS Only 2 channel analog audio signals may be sent to the second room. Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2-channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby Digital soundtrack. For CDs encoded in DTS To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. ADVANCED OPERATION • “ZONE2” will appear in the display window only when k is pressed, and SYSTM only when n is pressed. • If you press SELECT k when the unit is set to Zone 2 mode, the unit switches to Zone 3 mode. However, this unit does not support Zone 3 mode. To exit Zone 3 mode, press SELECT n. • Since the Zone 2 code is common to “ID1Z” and “ID2Z”, the Zone 2 code does not change even if the AMP library code (remote control setting) is switched. ■ Special considerations for DTS software 85 EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS What is a sound field What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. Changing parameter settings You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. ■ Elements of a sound field TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR REC LEARN AUDIO DISC SKIP SYSTEM In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD LEVEL DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD BAND TV INPUT VOL If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. MUTE MENU SRCH MODE A-E/CAT. CH 5 SELECT Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. SET MENU TV VOL Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only – for example, from the ceiling or a wall. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface – walls, ceiling, the back of the room – so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. PRESET/CH TITLE 1 POWER POWER TV AV CH TV MUTE ENTER ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC 1 2 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 AMP REC ENTERTAIN 4 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 7 A SPEAKERS B 9 MOVIE 3 4 2 3 8 NIGHT 0 ENT. 10 CHP/INDEX 1 Press AMP. AMP 2 3 Turn on the video monitor and press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display mode. ON SCREEN DISPLAY Select the sound field program you want to adjust. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 4 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 7 8 A SPEAKERS B 9 MOVIE NIGHT 0 ENT. 10 CHP/INDEX Program No. Program name P04 MOVIE THEATER Cursor .General DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;15ms P.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;20ms S.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 Parameters 86 Parameter values EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS 4 ■ Resetting parameters to the factory presets Press u / d to select the parameters. PRESET/CH TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH To reset all parameters Use PARAM. INI (see page 72). TV VOL 5 Press j / i to change the parameter value. When you set a parameter to a value other than the factory-set value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name on the on-screen display. PRESET/CH TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL y If you press and hold </> to change the parameter value, the front panel display automatically stops at the factory preset parameter momently. 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 as necessary to change other program parameters. Note You cannot change parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to OFF (see page 71). Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter value again. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 87 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ■ DSP LEVEL (DSP level) Function: Description: Control range: Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. –6 dB to +3 dB ■ INIT. DLY/P. INIT. DLY (Initial delay) Function: Description: Control range: Changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. 1 to 99 msec Source Sound Level Level Level Early Reflections Time Time Time Delay Delay Delay Sound Source Reflection Face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms ■ ROOM SIZE/P. ROOM SIZE (Room size) Function: Description: Control range: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. 0.1 to 2.0 Time Early Reflections Time Level Level Level Source Sound Time Sound Source Small value = 0.1 88 Large value = 2.0 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ LIVENESS (Liveness) Function: Description: Control range: Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. 0 to 10 Source Sound Time Level Dead Level Level Live Time Small Reflected Sound Small value = 0 Time Large Reflected Sound Large value = 10 ■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround initial delay) Function: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels are used. Control Range: 1 to 49 msec ■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround room size) Function: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. Control Range: 0.1 to 2.0 ■ S. LIVENESS (Surround liveness) Function: Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. Control Range: 0 to 10 ■ SB INI. DLY (Surround back initial delay) Function: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 1 to 49 msec ■ SB ROOM SIZE (Surround back room size) Function: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0.1 to 2.0 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ SB LIVENESS (Surround back liveness) Function: Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0 to 10 89 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ REV.TIME (Reverberation time) Function: Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Control Range: 1.0 to 5.0 sec Source Sound Reverberation Reverberation Early Reflections Sound Source 60 dB 60 dB Reverberation time Reverberation time 60 dB Reverberation time Long Reverberation Short Reverberation Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s ■ REV.DELAY (Reverberation delay) Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. Control Range: 0 to 250 msec Level Function: Source Sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time Reverberation delay Reverberation time ■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation level) Level Function: Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control Range: 0 to 100% Source Sound Reverberation level Time 90 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ DIALG.LIFT (Dialog lift) Function: Description: Choices: Adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound. 0/1/2/3/4/5, initial setting is 0. For 2ch Stereo: ■ DIRECT (Direct) Function: Choices: Bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP processors for pure high fidelity sound when playing 2-channel analog sources. AUTO, OFF Notes • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. • When “BASS OUT” is set to BOTH, or “FRONT SP” set to SMALL and “BASS OUT” set to SWFR, front left and right speaker lowfrequency signals are redirected to the subwoofer. For 7ch Stereo: Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode. Control Range: 0 – 100% ■ CT LEVEL (Center level) ■ SL LEVEL (Surround left level) ■ SR LEVEL (Surround right level) ■ SB LEVEL (Surround back level) ■ PL LEVEL (Presence left level) ■ PR LEVEL (Presence level) For PRO LOGIC IIx Music and PRO LOGIC II Music: ■ PANORAMA (Panorama) Function: Choices: Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. OFF, ON ■ DIMENSION (Dimension) Function: Control range: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). Function: Control range: Initial setting: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers) 3 Note This parameter can be set only when SUR.STANDARD is selected. 91 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ CENTER WIDTH (Center width) SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS For DTS Neo:6 Music: ■ C. IMAGE (Center image) Function: Control range: Initial setting: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. 0 to 1.0 0.3 Note This parameter can be set only when SUR.STANDARD is selected. 92 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. On-screen display does not appear. No sound Remedy Refer to page The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cord firmly. — The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers. 74 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use it normally. — The setting for the on-screen display is set to “DISPLAY OFF”. Select the full display or short display mode. 59 “GRAY BACK” in SET MENU is set to OFF, and no video signal is currently being received. Set “GRAY BACK” to AUTO to always show the OSD. 71 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone. 24 The input mode is set to DTS or ANALOG. Select AUTO. 37 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT, MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) or the input selector buttons. 30 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 12 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 30 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation button of this unit to resume audio output, then adjust the volume. 31 The input mode is set to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal. Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. 37 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being received from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Turn on the video conversion function. 71 11-14 15-20 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No picture Cause 93 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Cause Remedy Refer to page Check that the impedance selector setting is correct. 74 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute. 31 Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 Incorrect balance settings in SET MENU. Adjust the SPEAKER LEVEL settings. 66 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound from the effect speakers. The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn them on. 36 You are using a source or program combination that does not output sound from all channels. Try another sound field program. 56 The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 66 “CENTER SP” in SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker. 64 One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for 7ch Stereo) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 56 The output level of the surround speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the surround speakers. 66 “SUR. L/R SP” in SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and right speakers. 64 A monaural source is being played with STRAIGHT. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn on the sound fields. — Presence speakers are selected. Select surround back speakers in SUR. B L/R SP. 65 “SUR. L/R SP” in SET MENU is set to NONE. If the surround left and right speakers are set to NONE, the surround back speaker setting is automatically set to NONE. Select the appropriate setting for the surround speakers. 64 “SUR. B L/R SP” in SET MENU is set to NONE. Select LRGx1 or SMLx1. 65 “LFE/BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set to FRNT when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 65 “LFE/BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set to SWFR or FRNT when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 65 No sound from the center speaker. No sound from the surround speakers. No sound from the surround back speakers. No sound from the subwoofer. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. The source does not contain low bass signals. 94 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator on the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. 37 A “humming” sound can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the GND terminal of this unit. 19 The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to this unit through an MC-head amplifier. 19 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to this DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT jacks. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 15-19 The source component is not connected to this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 15-19 The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “MEMORY GUARD” in SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF. 71 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 12 Some components cannot record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 95 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. There is noise when the OSD is displayed. This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. Refer to page Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The OSD may be disturbed when displaying OSD through component video connections. Select OFF in CMPNT OSD. 71 The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM 96 Cause Remedy Refer to page The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. 21 Use the manual tuning method. 40 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 21 Use the manual tuning method. 40 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. 40 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 40 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. The remote control does not “learn” new functions. Cause Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 The manufacturer code was not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly. 76 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer. 76 74, 76 The remote control ID and this unit’s ID do not match. Switch the library code. Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons using the Learn feature. 79 The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. 3 The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. 79 The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. — Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new functions. 82 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 97 RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS If you want to reset all of your unit’s parameters for any reason, do the following. This procedure completely resets ALL parameters, including the SET MENU, level, assign and tuner presets. Be sure this unit is in standby mode. 4 Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection. STANDBY /ON (U.S.A. model) VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h NEXT SPEAKERS A B TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM STRAIGHT INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 1,3 2 1,4 1 With the unit in the standby mode, hold down STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel and press STANDBY/ON. The ADVANCED SETUP menu appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT While holding down, press STANDBY /ON EFFECT y To cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes, press STANDBY/ON. 2 Rotate PROGRAM to move through the menu and select “PRESET”. PROGRAM 3 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select the desired setting. STRAIGHT EFFECT RESET CANCEL 98 To reset the unit to its factory presets. To cancel without making any changes. If you selected “RESET”, the unit is reset to its factory presets and switches to standby mode. If you selected “CANCEL”, the unit switches to standby mode and nothing is reset. GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Audio formats ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “flyover” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games. Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/ 24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality fullmotion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). The unit incorporates DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to existing 5.1-channel format. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. 99 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a discrete 5channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode. ■ Dolby Surround GLOSSARY Sound field programs Audio information ■ CINEMA DSP ■ ITU-R Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R recommends a standard speaker placement which is used in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering purposes. ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. 100 ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. GLOSSARY Video signal information ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture; color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 101 SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 100 W • Video Signal Type ......................................................... PAL/NTSC • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................... 140 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω .......................................................135/170/200/245 W • DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ...................................................... 150 W • IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω .................................................... 110 W • Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................... 50 dB or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-video ................................ 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ............................................. 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION* • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [General model] ....................... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ........................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ...................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................ 120 or more • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ............................................................ 76 dB/70 dB • Frequency Response CD terminal to Front L/R ..................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 0.2%/0.3% • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ...... 0.02% or less CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ............................ 0.06% or less • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ...................................................... 42 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) Phono (5 mV) to REC OUT [U.K., Europe and Australia models] .................... 81 dB or more [Other models] ...................................................... 86 dB or more CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ............... 100 dB or more • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 530 to 1710 kHz [General model] ................................ 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] .................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R .............................................................. 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (shorted) to Front L/R ................. 60 dB/55 dB or more CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ........ 60 dB/45 dB or more • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency ............................................... 350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency ......................................... 3.5 kHz • Phones Output ......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO ................................................................. 2.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc. ................................................................ 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT .............................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ • Output Level/Output Impedance REC OUT ............................................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT ....................................................................2 V/1.2 kΩ SUB WOOFER .......................................................... 4 V/1.7 kΩ ZONE 2 OUTPUT [U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models] ................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ 102 • Frequency Response ........................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB AM SECTION* • Usable Sensitivity ........................................................... 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] .............................................. AC 240 V, 50 Hz [China model] ................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] ................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................ AC 230 V, 50 Hz [General model] ............. AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... 400 W/500 VA [Other models] .................................................................. 440 W • Standby Power Consumption .................................... 0.1 W or less • AC Outlets [U.K. and Australia models] ............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum) [U.S.A., Canada and China models]... 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [Europe and General models] ............... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 171 x 420 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 16-1/2”) • Weight ............................................................ 12.5 kg (27 lbs 9 oz) *Except Europe model 01EN_RX-V757_U-cv_version1.fm Page 1 Friday, December 24, 2004 4:29 PM U RX-V757 RX-V757 AV Receiver © 2005 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WE59930-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha RX-V757 User manual
- italiano: Yamaha RX-V757 Manuale utente
- русский: Yamaha RX-V757 Руководство пользователя
- français: Yamaha RX-V757 Manuel utilisateur
- español: Yamaha RX-V757 Manual de usuario
- Deutsch: Yamaha RX-V757 Benutzerhandbuch
- português: Yamaha RX-V757 Manual do usuário
- dansk: Yamaha RX-V757 Brugermanual
- suomi: Yamaha RX-V757 Ohjekirja
- čeština: Yamaha RX-V757 Uživatelský manuál
- svenska: Yamaha RX-V757 Användarmanual
- Türkçe: Yamaha RX-V757 Kullanım kılavuzu
- polski: Yamaha RX-V757 Instrukcja obsługi
- română: Yamaha RX-V757 Manual de utilizare